all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.55 MiB | November 06 2009 | |||
1 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 5.23 MiB | November 06 2009 | |||
1 |
|
User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 4.25 MiB | November 06 2009 | |||
1 |
|
User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 2.03 MiB | November 06 2009 | |||
1 |
|
User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 2.67 MiB | November 06 2009 | |||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | November 06 2009 | ||||||
1 | External Photos | November 06 2009 | ||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | November 06 2009 | ||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | November 06 2009 | ||||||
1 | Internal Photos | November 06 2009 | ||||||
1 | RF Exposure Info | November 06 2009 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | November 06 2009 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | November 06 2009 | ||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos | November 06 2009 |
1 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.55 MiB | November 06 2009 |
Operation Manual NAVIGATION AV SYSTEM AVIC-Z110BT Notice to all users:
This software requires that the navigation system is properly connected to your vehicles parking brake and depending on your vehicle, additional installation may be required. For more information, please contact your Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at
(800) 421-1404. English Contents Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, keep this man-
ual in a safe place for future reference. Important The screens shown in the examples may differ from actual screens. Actual screens may be changed without notice for performance and function improvements. Introduction Information to User 9 License Agreement 10 PIONEER AVIC-Z110BT - for U.S.A. 10 PIONEER AVIC-Z110BT - for Canada 12 Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas Data 14 Licenses 17 About the database 20 About the Data for the Map Database 20 Copyright Notices for North American data 20 Important Safety Information 21 GOOG-411 sevice 22 Speed limit indication 22 Additional Safety Information 22 Parking brake interlock 22 When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT 23 To avoid battery exhaustion 23 Rear view camera 23 Notes Before Using the System 23 Failure to operate 23 Visit Our Web site 24 Manual overview 24 How to use this manual 24 Terminology 24 Definitions of terminology 25 Notice regarding video viewing 25 Notice regarding DVD-Video viewing 25 Notice regarding MP3 file usage 25 iPod compatibility 25 2 En Map coverage 26 Protecting the LCD panel and screen 26 Notes on internal memory 26 Before removing the vehicle battery 26 Data subject to erasure 26 Basic operation Checking part names and functions 27 Adjusting the LCD panel angle 28 Inserting and ejecting a disc 28 Inserting a disc 29 Ejecting a disc 29 Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card 29 Inserting an SD memory card 29 Ejecting an SD memory card 30 Plugging and unplugging a USB storage device 30 Plugging in a USB storage device 30 Unplugging a USB storage device 31 Connecting and disconnecting an iPod 31 Connecting your iPod 31 Disconnecting your iPod 31 Flow from startup to termination 31 On first-time startup 31 Regular startup 32 How to use the navigation menu screens Screen switching overview 34 What you can do on each menu 35 Operating list screens (e.g. POI list) 35 Shortcut menu 35 Selecting the Shortcut 36 Canceling the Shortcut 36 Displaying the rear view camera image 36 How to use the map How to read the map screen 37 Displaying the AV information bar 38 Enlarged map of the intersection 39 Display during freeway driving 39 Operating the map screen 39 Contents Changing the scale of the map 39 Switching the map orientation 39 Scrolling the map 40 Quick Access 40 Customizing the map screen settings Setting the Item on the Map Screen 42 Setting Close Up View 42 City Map 42 Setting the switching of the city map display 42 Show Traffic Incident 43 Bluetooth Connected 43 Setting the current street name display 43 Setting the Address Search icon display 43 3D Landmark 43 Displaying maneuvers 44 MSN Direct 44 Displaying POI on the map 44 Displaying preinstalled POIs on the map 44 Displaying the customized POIs 45 Switching the view mode 45 Setting the map color change between day and night 46 Changing the road color 46 Changing the setting of navigation interruption screen 47 Selecting Quick Access 47 Setting a route to your destination The basic flow of creating your route 48 Checking the location on the map 48 Checking the calculated route 48 Display multiple routes 49 Modifying the route calculation conditions 49 Checking the current itinerary 50 Adding a waypoint 50 Checking and modifying the current route Checking the current itinerary 52 Editing waypoints 52 Adding a waypoint 52 Deleting a waypoint 53 Sorting waypoints 53 Modifying the route calculation conditions 53 Canceling the route guidance 54 Searching for and selecting a location Searching for a location by address 55 Searching for a city name first 55 Finding the location by specifying the house number 56 Searching for a name by entering multiple keywords 57 Setting up a route to your home 57 Searching for Points of Interest (POI) 58 Searching for POIs by specifying a category first 58 Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facilities 58 Searching for a nearby POI 58 Searching for POIs around the destination 59 Searching for POIs around the city 59 Selecting destination from Address Book 59 Searching for POIs by using the data on the SD memory card 60 Selecting a location you searched for recently 60 Searching for a location by coordinates 60 Registering and editing locations Registering a location into Address Book 62 Registering a location by Address Book 62 Registering a location by scroll mode 62 En 3 Contents Editing registered locations 62 Editing the entry in Address Book 62 Editing your home 63 Sorting the entry in Address Browsing news headlines 74 Browsing stock quotes 75 Selecting stock symbols 75 Viewing the detailed stock quotes 75 Book 63 Deleting the entry in Address Book 63 Exporting and importing the entry in Address Book 64 Exporting the entry in Address Book 64 Importing Address Book edited on NavGate FEEDS 64 Deleting an entry in History 65 Browsing information on MSN Direct Activating the service 66 Checking your product key 66 Subscribing to the MSN Direct service 67 Activating the MSN Direct function 67 Browsing gas prices 67 Browsing movie times 68 Searching for a theater by selecting a movie title 68 Searching for a movie title by selecting a theater 69 Browsing weather information 69 Checking the local weather information 70 Checking worldwide weather conditions 70 Using traffic information 70 Viewing the traffic event 70 Checking traffic information on the route 71 How to read traffic information on the map 71 Viewing the traffic flow 72 Selecting traffic information to display 73 Browsing local events 73 4 En Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device Preparing communication devices 76 Registering your Bluetooth devices 76 Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices 76 Searching for a specified Bluetooth device 77 Pairing from your Bluetooth devices 78 Deleting a registered device 78 Connecting a registered Bluetooth device 79 Using hands-free phoning Displaying the Phone Menu 80 Making a phone call 80 Direct dialing 80 Making a call home easily 81 Calling a number in the Contacts List 81 Making a phone call using the received call history 81 Making a phone call using the dialed number history 82 Making a phone call using missed call history 82 Dialing GOOG-411 83 Dialing the entry in the Address Book 83 Dialing a facilitys phone number 83 Dialing from the map 83 Receiving a phone call 84 Answering an incoming call 84 Rejecting an incoming call 84 Transferring the phone book 84 Setting the Bluetooth Settings 85 Editing the device name 86 Contents Editing the password 86 Stopping Bluetooth wave transmission 86 Echo canceling and noise reduction 86 Answering a call automatically 86 Setting the automatic rejection function 87 Clearing memory 87 Updating the Bluetooth wireless technology software 87 Notes for hands-free phoning 88 Using the radio (FM) Reading the screen 101 Using the touch panel keys 101 Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display 102 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 102 Using the Function menu 102 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 102 Tuning in strong signals 103 Customizing preferences The options in the Navi Settings menu 90 Displaying the Navi Settings Using the radio (AM) Reading the screen 104 Using the touch panel keys 104 screen 90 Checking the connections of leads 90 Checking sensor learning status and driving status 90 Using the Gas Mileage function 91 Recording your travel history 93 Using the demonstration guidance 94 Registering your home 94 Correcting the current location 94 Options on the System Settings menu 94 Displaying the System Settings screen 94 Customizing the regional settings 95 Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone 96 Changing the splash screen 97 Changing to the splash screen stored in the SD memory card 97 Setting for rear view camera 98 Adjusting the response positions of the touch panel (touch panel calibration) 98 Setting the illumination color 98 Checking the version information 99 Replicating the settings 99 Turning off the screen 100 Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display 104 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 105 Using the Function menu 105 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 105 Tuning in strong signals 105 Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio) Reading the screen 106 Using the touch panel keys 106 Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display 107 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 107 Switching the display 107 Using the Function menu 107 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 108 Switching the seek mode 108 Tuning in strong signals 108 Switching the reception mode 108 En 5 Contents Playing audio CDs Reading the screen 109 Using the touch panel keys 109 Selecting a track from the list 110 Using the Function menu 110 Playing music files on ROM Reading the screen 111 Using the touch panel keys 112 Selecting a track from the list 112 Using the Function menu 112 Playing a DVD-Video Reading the screen 114 Using the touch panel keys 114 Resuming playback (Bookmark) 115 Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time 116 Direct number search 116 Operating the DVD menu 116 Using DVD menu by touch panel keys 116 Frame-by-frame playback 117 Slow motion playback 117 Using the Function menu 117 Playing a DVD-VR disc Reading the screen 119 Using the touch panel keys 119 Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time 120 Switch the playback mode 121 Using the short-time skip function 121 Playing by selecting from the title list 121 Frame-by-frame playback 121 Slow motion playback 121 Using the Function menu 122 Playing a DivX video Reading the screen 123 6 En Using the touch panel keys 123 Frame-by-frame playback 124 Slow motion playback 124 Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time 124 Playing by selecting from the title list 125 Using the Function menu 125 DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup Displaying DVD/DivX Setup menu 126 Setting the top-priority languages 126 Setting the angle icon display 126 Setting the aspect ratio 126 Setting the parental lock 127 Setting the code number and level 127 Setting Auto Play 127 Setting the subtitle file for DivX 128 Language code chart for DVDs 129 Playing music files (from USB or SD) Starting procedure 130 Reading the screen 130 Using the touch panel keys (Music) 131 Selecting a track from the list 131 Using the Function menu 132 Playing video files (from USB or SD) Starting procedure 133 Reading the screen 133 Using the touch panel keys (Video) 133 Playing by selecting from the title list 134 Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time 134 Using the Function menu 135 Using an iPod (iPod) Starting procedure 136 Reading the screen 136 Using the touch panel keys (Music) 137 Contents Browsing for a song 137 Operating this navigation system's iPod function from your iPod 138 Starting the video playback 138 Using the touch panel keys (Video) 139 Browsing for a video 139 Using the Function menu 140 Using the Bluetooth audio player Reading the screen 142 Using the touch panel keys 143 Using the Function menu 143 Using the XM tuner Reading the screen 144 Using the touch panel keys 144 Selecting an XM channel directly 145 Displaying the Radio ID 145 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 146 Selecting a channel from the list 146 Using My Mix function 146 Using the direct traffic announcement function 147 Using the Function menu 147 Setting the memorized songs 148 Using the SIRIUS tuner Reading the screen 149 Using the touch panel keys 149 Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly 150 Display the Radio ID 150 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 150 Using My Mix function 151 Using the direct traffic announcement function 151 Using the Instant Replay function 152 Using the Function menu 152 Setting the memorized songs 152 Using the Game Alert function 153 Displaying Game Information 153 Using AV input Using AV1 155 Using AV2 155 Using the touch panel keys 155 Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2) Reading the screen 156 Using the touch panel keys 156 Other functions Selecting the video for Rear display 157 Operating the picture adjustment 157 Customizing preferences Options on the AV System Settings menu 159 Displaying the AV System Settings menu 159 Setting video input 1 (AV1) 159 Setting video input 2 (AV2) 159 Switching the auto antenna setting 159 Changing the wide screen mode 160 Setting the rear output 160 Switching the muting/attenuation timing 161 Switching the muting/attenuation level 161 Changing the voice output of the navigation guidance 161 Acquiring/Cataloging iPod music information 161 Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 162 The AV Sound Settings menu options 163 Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu 163 Using balance adjustment 163 Using the equalizer 164 Adjusting loudness 165 Using subwoofer output 165 Using the high pass filter 166 En 7 Contents Adjusting source levels 166 Enhancing bass (Bass Booster) 166 Setting the simulated sound stage 166 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice To Ensure Safe Driving 168 Basics of Voice Operation 168 Flow of voice operation 168 Starting voice operation 169 How to use the voice operation 169 Available Basic Voice Commands 171 Basic commands 171 Voice operation for the iPod 171 Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod) 172 Voice commands related to hands-free phoning 173 Tips for Voice Operation 174 Other functions Setting the anti-theft function 175 Setting the password 175 Entering the password 175 Deleting the password 175 Forgotten passwords 176 Restoring the default setting 176 Returning the navigation system to the initial state 176 Appendix Troubleshooting 177 Messages and how to react to them 181 Messages for audio functions 182 Positioning technology 183 Positioning by GPS 183 Positioning by Dead Reckoning 183 How do GPS and Dead Reckoning work together? 183 Handling large errors 184 When positioning by GPS is impossible 184 8 En Conditions likely to cause noticeable positioning errors 185 Route setting information 186 Route search specifications 186 Handling and care of discs 187 Built-in drive and care 188 Ambient conditions for playing a disc 188 Playable discs 188 DVD-Video and CD 188 AVCHD recorded discs 188 Playing DualDisc 189 Dolby Digital 189 DTS sound 189 Detailed information for playable media 189 Compatibility 189 Media compatibility chart 192 Bluetooth 196 SD and SDHC logo 196 WMA 196 DivX 197 AAC 197 Detailed information regarding connectable iPods 197 iPod 197 iPhone 198 iTunes 198 Using the LCD screen correctly 198 Handling the LCD screen 198 Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen 198 Maintaining the LCD screen 198 LED (light-emitting diode) backlight 198 Display information 200 Destination Menu 200 Phone Menu screen 200 Settings Menu 201 Glossary 204 Specifications 207 Introduction Information to User This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the users right to operate the equipment. FCC ID : AJDK026 IC : 775E-K026 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation of this device. MADE IN CHINA For Canadian model This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This transmitter must not be co-located or op-
erated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Chapter 01 I n t r o d u c t i o n This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-
stalled and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator and persons body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). CAUTION:
USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PER-
FORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. CAUTION:
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HA-
ZARD. WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords asso-
ciated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65 known to the State of California and other govern-
mental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. En 9 Chapter 01 Introduction License Agreement PIONEER AVIC-Z110BT - for U.S.A. THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (PIONEER). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI-
TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE-
FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-
WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (SUPPLIERS), AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-
ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas Data). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE RE-
TURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY WRITTEN MATERI-
ALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PUR-
CHASED THEM. USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT. 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non exclusive license to use the software installed on the Pioneer products (the Software) and the related documentation solely for your own personal use or for internal use by your busi-
ness, only on such Pioneer products. You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate, port, modify or make derivative works of the Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not expressly authorized by this agreement. You shall not derive or attempt to derive the source code or structure of all or any portion of the Software by reverse engi-
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any 10 En other means. You shall not use the Software to operate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data for other per-
sons or entities. Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-
tary ownership rights in the Software. The Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any copyright notice or proprietary legend con-
tained in or on the Software. You may transfer all of your license rights in the Software, the related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to another party, provided that the party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-
cense Agreement. 2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY The Software and related documentation are provided to you AS IS. PIONEER AND ITS LI-
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-
lectively referred to as Pioneer) MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and may contain some nonconformities, defects or errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-
ware will meet your needs or expectations, that operation of the Software will be error free or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer does not make any representations or warran-
ties regarding the use or results of the use of the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability or otherwise. Introduction LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 3 IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPEN-
DITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVI-
DUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CON-
TRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLI-
GENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF PIONEERS WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-
DUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-
itation of incidental or consequential da-
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of liability shall not be applic-
able to the extent that they are prohibited by any applicable federal, state or local law which provides that such a disclaimer or limitation cannot be waived or preempted. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES 4 You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be exported outside the United States except as authorized and as permitted by the laws and Chapter 01 I n t r o d u c t i o n regulations of the United States. If the Soft-
ware has been rightfully obtained by you out-
side of the United States, you agree that you will not re-export the Software nor any other technical data received from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, except as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United States and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-
tion in which you obtained the Software. TERMINATION 5 This Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate it at any time by destroying the Software. The Agreement also will termi-
nate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-
mination, you agree to destroy the Software. 6 U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS If the Software is being acquired by or on be-
half of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, the Data is licensed with Limited Rights. Utilization of the Software is subject to the restrictions specified in the Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or the equivalent clause for non-
defense agencies. Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc., 2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA 90810. 7 MISCELLANEOUS This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer and you regarding its subject matter. No change in this Agreement shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers do not have the authority to change this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-
erned by and construed in accordance with the internal laws of the State of California. If any provision of this Agreement is declared in-
valid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-
sions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect. En 11 Chapter 01 Introduction PIONEER AVIC-Z110BT- for Canada THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
(PIONEER). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE-
FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN-
STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE-
MENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA-
BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER
(S) (SUPPLIERS), AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 14). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO-
DUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-
MENT. 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non exclusive license to use the software installed on the Pioneer products (the Software) and the related documentation solely for your own personal use or for internal use by your busi-
ness, only on such Pioneer products. You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate, port, modify or make derivative works of the Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not expressly authorized by this agreement. You shall not derive, or attempt to derive, the source code or structure of all or any portion of the Software by reverse engi-
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any other means. You shall not use the Software to 12 En operate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data for other per-
sons or entities. Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-
tary ownership rights in the Software. The Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any copyright notice or proprietary legend con-
tained in or on the Software. You may transfer all of your license rights in the Software, the related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to another party, provided that the party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-
cense Agreement. 2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY The Software and related documentation are provided to you AS IS. PIONEER AND ITS LI-
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-
lectively referred to as Pioneer) MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and may contain some nonconformities, defects or errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-
ware will meet your needs or expectations, that operation of the Software will be error free or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer does not make any representations or warran-
ties regarding the use or results of the use of the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability or otherwise. Introduction LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 3 IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, IN-
VESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CON-
NECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION IN THE AGGRE-
GATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WAR-
RANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MIS-
REPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF PIONEERS WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-
DUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-
itation of incidental or consequential da-
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of liability shall not be applic-
able to the extent that they are prohibited by any applicable federal, state or local law which provides that such a disclaimer or limitation cannot be waived or preempted. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES 4 You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be exported outside Canada except as authorized and as permitted by the laws and regulations of Canada. If the Software has been rightfully Chapter 01 obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree that you will not re-export the Software nor any other technical data received from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, except as per-
mitted by the laws and regulations of Canada and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-
tion in which you obtained the Software. I n t r o d u c t i o n TERMINATION 5 This Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate it at any time by destroying the Software. The Agreement also will termi-
nate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-
mination, you agree to destroy the Software. 6 MISCELLANEOUS This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer and you regarding its subject matter. No change in this Agreement shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers do not have the authority to change this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-
erned by and construed in accordance with the internal laws of the Province of Ontario and the federal laws of Canada applicable therein. If any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable, the remain-
ing provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect. En 13 CHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AC-
CURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRIT-
TEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EM-
PLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH AD-
VICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI-
TION OF THE AGREEMENT. Limitation of Liability. 4 TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA-
MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTER-
RUPTION OR THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITH-
STANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANY CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT. Termination. 5 This Agreement will terminate immediately and automatically, without notice, if you breach any term of this Agreement. You agree that in the event of termination of the Agree-
ment, you shall return the Data (including all documentation and all copies) to Tele Atlas and its suppliers. Chapter 01 Introduction Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas Data THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE AGREE-
MENT) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (Tele Atlas). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. 1 Grant of License. Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-
exclusive license to use the map data and business points of interest information (the POIs), (together, the Data) contained on these discs, solely for personal, non-commer-
cial use and not to operate a service bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data of other persons or entities. You may make one (1) copy of the Data for archival or backup purposes only but you may not other-
wise copy, reproduce, modify, make derivative works, derive the structure of or reverse engi-
neer the Data. The Data contains confidential and proprietary information and materials, and may contain trade secrets, so you agree to hold the Data in confidence and in trust and not to disclose the Data or any portions in any form, including by renting, leasing, publish-
ing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the Data to any third party. You are prohibited from removing or obscuring any copyright, tra-
demark notice or restrictive legend. 2 Ownership. The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its li-
censors and they retain all ownership rights in the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, oblit-
erate, or obscure any copyright notice or pro-
prietary legend contained in or on the Data. 3 Warranty Disclaimer. THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS AND TELE ATLAS AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN-
CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MER-
14 En Chapter 01 I n t r o d u c t i o n Introduction Indemnity. 6 You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (includ-
ing their respective licensors, suppliers, as-
signees, subsidiaries, affiliated companies, and the respective officers, directors, employ-
ees, shareholders, agents and representatives) free and harmless from and against any liabili-
ty, loss, injury (including injuries resulting in death), demand, action, cost, expense, or claim of any kind or character, including but not limited to attorneys fees, arising out of or in connection with any use or possession by you of the Data. 7 U.S. Government Rights. If you are an agency, department, or other en-
tity of the United States Government, or funded in whole or in part by the United States Government, then use, duplication, reproduc-
tion, release, modification, disclosure or trans-
fer of this commercial product and accompanying documentation, is restricted in accordance with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED rights as described in DFARS 252.227-7014(a)
(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD commercial computer software definition), DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD policy on commercial computer software), FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987) (commercial com-
puter software clause for civilian agencies), DFARS 252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD techni-
cal data commercial items clause); FAR 52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (ci-
vilian agency technical data and noncommer-
cial computer software clause); and/or FAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial item ac-
quisitions), as applicable. In case of conflict between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions listed herein and this License, the construc-
tion that provides greater limitations on the Governments rights shall control. Contractor/
manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America, Inc., 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-
1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330. The Data is 1984-2009 by Tele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RE-
SERVED. For purpose of any public disclosure provision under any federal, state or local law, it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and a proprietary commercial product and not sub-
ject to disclosure. If you are an agency, department, or other en-
tity of any State government, the United States Government or any other public entity or funded in whole or in part by the United States Government, then you hereby agree to protect the Data from public disclosure and to consid-
er the Data exempt from any statute, law, regu-
lation, or code, including any Sunshine Act, Public Records Act, Freedom of Information Act, or equivalent, which permits public ac-
cess and/or reproduction or use of the Data. In the event that such exemption is challenged under any such laws, this Agreement shall be considered breached and any and all right to retain any copies or to use of the Data shall be terminated and considered immediately null and void. Any copies of the Data held by you shall immediately be destroyed. If any court of competent jurisdiction considers this clause void and unenforceable, in whole or in part, for any reason, this Agreement shall be con-
sidered terminated and null and void, in its en-
tirety, and any and all copies of the Data shall immediately be destroyed. 8 Additional Provisions with respect to POI Data only. a No Creation of Mailing Lists. You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to create mailing lists or (ii) for other such si-
milar uses. b Compliance. You will use the POIs in compliance with all applicable federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations. c Indemnification. You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc. harmless against all third party claims or liability which are based in whole or in part of the users failure to comply with such laws, rules and regulations or which result from the use of the POIs through you. d Warranty. En 15 or unenforceable, such provision or part there-
of shall be stricken from this Agreement and the remainder of this Agreement shall be valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum extent possible. Any notice under this Agree-
ment shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas North America, Inc., Attention Contracts De-
partment, 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766 USA. The covenants and obligations un-
dertaken by you herein are intended for the di-
rect benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced by Tele Atlas directly against you. Chapter 01 Introduction In addition to the Warranties contained in the Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. e POIs Segregation. You are prohibited from combining or mer-
ging the POIs with any other POI data. The POIs shall be maintained in such a way that they are separately identifiable from all other POI data at all times. 9 Agreement in English. The parties hereto confirm that they have re-
quested that this Agreement and all attach-
ments and related documents be drafted in English. Les parties ont exig que le prsent contrat et tous les documents attachs soient rdigs en Anglais. 10 Miscellaneous. This is the exclusive and complete Agreement between Tele Atlas and you regarding its sub-
ject matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall create a joint venture, partnership or principal-
agent relationship between Tele Atlas and you. The internal laws of California shall govern this Agreement and you consent to the juris-
diction of the Northern District of California or the State of California for the County of Santa Clara. Sections 2 10 shall survive the expira-
tion or termination of this Agreement. This Agreement may be amended, altered, or modi-
fied only by Tele Atlas. You may not assign any part of this Agreement without Tele Atlas prior written consent. You acknowledge and under-
stand that the Data may be subject to restric-
tions on exportation and agree to comply with any applicable export laws. In the event that any provision or part of a provision of this Agreement is determined to be invalid, illegal, 16 En Introduction Licenses
Licenses
7-Zip 7-Zip License for use and distribution 7-Zip Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Igor Pavlov. Licenses for files are:
1) 7z.dll: GNU LGPL + unRAR restriction 2) All other files: GNU LGPL The GNU LGPL + unRAR restriction means that you must follow both GNU LGPL rules and unRAR restriction rules. Note:
You can use 7-Zip on any computer, including a computer in a commercial organization. You don't need to register or pay for 7-Zip. GNU LGPL information This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA unRAR restriction The decompression engine for RAR archives was developed using source code of unRAR program. All copyrights to original unRAR code are owned by Alexander Roshal. The license for original unRAR code has the following restriction:
The unRAR sources cannot be used to re-create the RAR compression algorithm, which is proprietary. Distribution of modified unRAR sources in separate form or as a part of other software is permitted, provided that it is clearly stated in the documentation and source comments that the code may not be used to develop a RAR (WinRAR) compatible archiver. Chapter 01 I n t r o d u c t i o n
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
<http://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public License, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below. 0. Additional Definitions. As used herein, this License refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser General Public License, and the GNU GPL refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. The Library refers to a covered work governed by this License, other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below. An Application is any work that makes use of an interface provided by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library. Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode of using an interface provided by the Library. A Combined Work is a work produced by combining or linking an Application with the Library. The particular version of the Library with which the Combined Work was made is also called the Linked Version. The Minimal Corresponding Source for a Combined Work means the Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version. The Corresponding Application Code for a Combined Work means the object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work. En 17 b) Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document. c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during execution, include the copyright notice for the Library among these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the copies of the GNU GPL and this license document. d) Do one of the following:
0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, and the Corresponding Application Code in a form suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying Corresponding Source. 1) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mecha-
nism is one that (a) uses at run time a copy of the Library already present on the users computer system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified version of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked Version. e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise be required to provide such information under section 6 of the GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is necessary to install and execute a modified version of the Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the Application with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application Code. If you use option 4d1, you must provide the Installation Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying Corresponding Source.) Chapter 01 Introduction 1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL. You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL. 2. Conveying Modified Versions. If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application that uses the facility
(other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified version:
a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the function or data, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or b) under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of this License applicable to that copy. 3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files. The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from a header file that is part of the Library. You may convey such object code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates (ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following:
a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document. 4. Combined Works. You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that, taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of the following:
a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. 18 En Chapter 01 I n t r o d u c t i o n 7-Zip Source Notice The software program used in this product contains 7-Zip library. 7-Zip contains the software granted permission for the usage under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License. A copy of appropriate source code is available at customer necessary expense for the distribution. Please contact our Customer Support Center to obtain a copy. For more information on the GNU Lesser General Public License, visit the GNUs website at http://www.gnu.org. Portions of the software in this product are copyright 1996 2007 The FreeType Project
(www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. Licensed under the FreeType Project LICENSE, 2006-Jan-27.
(http://www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT) Introduction 5. Combined Libraries. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by this License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your choice, if you do both of the following:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncom-
bined with any other library facilities, conveyed under the terms of this License. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU Lesser General Public License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that published version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser General Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall apply, that proxys public statement of acceptance of any version is permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the Library. En 19 Chapter 01 Introduction About the database About the Data for the Map Database
! Modifications related to roads, streets/high-
ways, terrain, construction and other things before/during the development period may not be reflected in this database. Inevitably, those modifications after that period are not reflected in this database.
! For more details about the map coverage of this navigation system, refer to the informa-
tion on our website.
! It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use any part or the whole of this map in any form without permission from the copyright owner.
! If the local traffic regulations or conditions deviate from this data, follow the local traf-
fic regulations (such as signs, indications, etc.) and conditions (such as construction, weather, etc.).
! The traffic regulation data used in the map database applies only to standard sized passenger vehicles. Note that regulations for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other non-standard vehicles are not included in the database. Copyright Notices for North American data 1) Tele Atlas MultiNet North America data. As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice for Tele Atlas MultiNet North America is:
NOTICE 1984 2009 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved. This material is proprietary and the subject of copyright protection and other intellectual property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas. Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of se-
lected Statistics Canada computer files under Agreement number 6776. The product in-
cludes information copied with permission from Canadian authorities, including Cana-
da Post Corporation and GeoBase, All rights reserved. The product is sourced in part from Geography Division, Statistics Canada, 2006 Road Network File (RNF), 92-500-XWE/XWF. The incorporation of data sources from Statis-
tics Canada within this product shall not be construed as constituting an endorsement by Statistics Canada of such product. The use of this material is subject to the terms of a Li-
cense Agreement. You will be held liable for any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this material. 2) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice for all third-party brand icons (the Brand Icons) are located in the operators manual included in the Licensed Products. 3) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice with logo for infoUSA, Inc. is:
Data by Copyright 2009 C All Rights Reserved 4) As for Map Version, Tele Atlas. Rel. 07/2008. 20 En Introduction Important Safety Information WARNING
! Do not attempt to install or service your navi-
gation system by yourself. Installation or servi-
cing of the navigation system by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards.
! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this navigation system, park your vehicle to safe place and turn the ignition switch off
(ACC OFF) immediately and consult your deal-
er or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station. Do not use the navigation system in this condition because doing so may result in a fire, electric shock, or other failure.
! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or odor from the navigation system, or any other ab-
normal signs on the LCD screen, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Sta-
tion. Using this navigation system in this con-
dition may result in permanent damage to the system.
! Do not disassemble or modify this navigation system, as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause an electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station for internal inspection, adjustments or repairs.
! Do not allow this product to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, damage to the product, smoke, and over-
heating could result from contact with liquids. CAUTION
! When a route is calculated, the route and voice guidance for the route are automatically set. Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only information about traffic regulations ap-
plicable at the time when the route was calcu-
lated is shown. One-way streets and street closures may not be taken into consideration. For example, if a street is open during the Chapter 01 I n t r o d u c t i o n morning only, but you arrive later, it would be against the traffic regulations so you cannot drive along the set route. When driving, please follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system may not know some traffic regulations. Before using your navigation system, be sure to read and fully understand the following safety information:
p Read the entire manual before operating this navigation system. p The navigation features of your navigation system (and rear view camera option if pur-
chased) are intended solely as an aid to you in the operation of your vehicle. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness, judgment, and care when driving. p Do not operate this navigation system (or the rear view camera option if purchased) if doing so will divert your attention in any way from the safe operation of your vehicle. Always observe safe driving rules and fol-
low all existing traffic regulations. If you ex-
perience difficulty in operating the system or reading the display, park your vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake before making the necessary adjustments. p Never allow others to use the system un-
less they have read and understood the op-
erating instructions. p Never use this navigation system to route to hospitals, police stations or similar facil-
ities in an emergency. Stop using any func-
tions relating to the hands-free phone and please call 911. p Route and guidance information displayed by this equipment is for reference purposes only. It may not accurately reflect the latest permissible routes, road conditions, one way streets, road closures, or traffic restric-
tions. p Traffic restrictions and advisories currently in force should always take precedence over guidance given by the navigation sys-
tem. Always obey current traffic restric-
tions, even if the navigation system provides contrary advice. En 21 Chapter 01 Introduction p Failure to set correct information about the local time may result in the navigation sys-
tem providing improper routing and gui-
dance instructions. p Never set the volume of your navigation system so high that you cannot hear out-
side traffic and emergency vehicles. p To promote safety, certain functions are dis-
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or the parking brake is applied. p The data encoded in the built-in memory is the intellectual property of the provider, and the provider is responsible for such con-
tent. p Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and safety informa-
tion. p Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care-
fully. p Do not install this navigation system where it may (i) obstruct the drivers vision, (ii) im-
pair the performance of any of the vehicles operating systems or safety features, in-
cluding air bags or hazard lamp buttons or
(iii) impair the drivers ability to safely oper-
ate the vehicle. p Please remember to fasten your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. p Never use headphones while driving. GOOG-411 sevice p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the accuracy of the information. p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for changes to information services provided by related companies, such as cancellation of services or changing to pay-services. Also, we do not accept return of the pro-
duct for this reason. 22 En Speed limit indication The speed limit is based on the map database. The speed limit in the database may not match the actual speed limit of the current road. This is not a definite value. Be sure to drive according to the actual speed limit. Additional Safety Information Parking brake interlock Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD-
Video and certain touch key operations) of-
fered by this navigation system could be dan-
gerous and/or unlawful if used while driving. To prevent such functions from being used while the vehicle is in motion, there is an inter-
lock system that senses when the parking brake is set and when the vehicle is moving. If you attempt to use the functions described above while driving, they will become disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the park-
ing brake. WARNING
! LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CON-
NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CON-
NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH. IM-
PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS IN-
JURY OR DAMAGE.
! To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the potential violation of applicable laws, the navi-
gation system is not for use with a Video image that is visible to the driver.
! In some countries or states the viewing of Video image on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply, they must be obeyed. Introduction
! When applying the parking brake in order to view Video image or to enable other func-
tions offered by the navigation system, park your vehicle in a safe place, and keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill or otherwise might move when releasing the parking brake. CAUTION Accuracy/performance of interlock may be im-
pacted by such factors as GPS signal detection and driving habits or conditions of the place where the vehicle is parked. When you attempt to watch Video image while driving, the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited. will appear on the screen. To watch Video image on this display, stop the vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake. When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT The video output terminal (REAR MONITOR OUTPUT) is for connection of a display to en-
able passengers in the rear seats to watch video images. WARNING NEVER install the Rear Display in a location that enables the driver to watch video images while driving. p This cautionary statements apply to AVIC-
Z110BT. To avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this product. Using this product without run-
ning the engine can drain the battery. Chapter 01 I n t r o d u c t i o n WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. Rear view camera With an optional rear view camera, you are able to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or backing into a tight parking spot. WARNING
! SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.
! USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE. CAUTION
! For safety reasons, the rear view camera func-
tion is not available until the navigation sys-
tem boots up completely.
! The rear view mode is to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers, or while backing up. Do not use this function for entertainment purposes. Notes Before Using the System Important (Serial Number:) The serial number of this device is located on the bottom of this product. For your own security and convenience, be sure to record this number on the enclosed warranty card. Failure to operate Should the navigation system fail to operate properly, contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station. En 23 Chapter 01 Introduction After-sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor from which you purchased the product for after-
sales service (including warranty conditions) or any other information. In case the necessary information is not available, please contact the companies listed below. Please do not ship your product to the compa-
nies at the addresses listed below for repair without making advance contact.
! U.S.A Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760 800-421-1404
! CANADA Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT 300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 For warranty information, please see the Lim-
ited Warranty sheet included with your pro-
duct. Visit Our Web site Visit us at the following site:
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com In Canada http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca 1 Register your product. We will keep the details of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft. 2 Receive updates on the latest products and technologies. 3 Download owners manuals, order product catalogues, research new products, and much more. 4 Receive notices of software upgrades and software updates. Manual overview How to use this manual Finding the operation procedure for what you want to do When you have decided what you want to do, you can find the page you need from the Contents. Finding the operation procedure from a menu name If you want to check the meaning of an item displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-
cessary page from the Display information at the end of the manual. Glossary Use the glossary to find the meanings of terms. Terminology Before moving on, take a few minutes to read the following information about the conven-
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with these conventions will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new equipment.
! Buttons on your navigation system are de-
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:
e.g.) MENU button, MAP button.
! Items in different menus, screen titles, and functional components are described in bold with double quotation marks :
e.g.) Destination Menu screen or AV Source screen
! Touch panel keys that are available on the screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:
e.g.)
[Destination], [Settings].
! Extra information, alternatives and other notes are presented in the following for-
mat:
e.g.) p If the home location has not been stored yet, set the location first. 24 En Introduction
! References are indicated like this:
e.g.)
= For details, refer to How to use the navi-
gation menu screens on page 34. Definitions of terminology Front Display and Rear Display In this manual, the screen that is attached to the body of this navigation unit will be referred to as the Front Display. Any additional op-
tional screen that is purchased for use in con-
junction with this navigation unit will be referred to as the Rear Display. Video image Video image in this manual indicates mov-
ing images of DVD-Video, DivX, iPod, and any equipment that is connected to this system with an RCA cable, such as general-purpose AV equipment. External storage device (USB, SD) The SD memory card, SDHC memory card and USB memory device are collectively re-
ferred to as the external storage device (USB, SD). If it indicates the USB memory only, it is referred to as the USB storage device. SD memory card The SD memory card and SDHC memory card are collectively referred to as the SD memory card. Notice regarding video viewing Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-
stitute an infringement on the authors rights as protected by the Copyright Law. Chapter 01 I n t r o d u c t i o n Notice regarding DVD-
Video viewing This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Notice regarding MP3 file usage Supply of this navigation system conveys only a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-
enue-generating), real time broadcasting (ter-
restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-
tions. An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.com. iPod compatibility This product supports only the following iPod models and iPod software versions. Others may not work correctly.
! iPod nano first generation; Ver. 1.3.1
! iPod nano second generation; Ver. 1.1.3
! iPod nano third generation; Ver. 1.1.3
! iPod nano fourth generation; Ver. 1.0.3
! iPod fifth generation; Ver. 1.3
! iPod classic; Ver. 2.0.1
! iPod touch first generation; Ver. 2.2.1
! iPod touch second generation; Ver. 2.2.1 En 25 Notes on internal memory Before removing the vehicle battery If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the memory will be erased and must be repro-
gramed. p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-
vigation system to the initial state before you operate this function.
= For more detailed information about the items which would be erased, refer to Returning the navigation system to the initial state on page 176. Data subject to erasure The information is erased by disconnecting the yellow lead from the battery (or removing the battery itself). However, some items re-
main. p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-
vigation system to the initial state before you operate this function.
= For more detailed information about the items which would be erased, refer to Returning the navigation system to the initial state on page 176. Chapter 01 Introduction
! iPhone; Ver. 2.2
! iPhone 3G; Ver. 2.2.1 p In this manual, iPod and iPhone will be re-
ferred to as iPod. p When you use this navigation system with a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-
IU50V) (sold separately), you can control an iPod compatible with this navigation sys-
tem. p To obtain maximum performance, we re-
commend that you use the latest software for the iPod. p Operation methods may vary depending on the iPod models and the software version of iPod. p For more details about iPod compatibility with this navigation system, refer to the in-
formation on our website. p iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries. p iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc. Map coverage For more details about the map coverage of this navigation system, refer to the information on our website. Protecting the LCD panel and screen p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the LCD screen when this product is not being used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the LCD screen to prevent disruption of the video in the form of spots, colored stripes, etc. p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be sure to touch the touch panel keys with your finger and gently touch the screen. 26 En Basic operation Checking part names and functions This chapter gives information about the names of the parts and the main features using the buttons. 7 6 45 3 12 1 LCD screen 2 OPEN CLOSE button 3 TRK (c/d) button
= New translation required. Chapter 02 B a s i c o p e r a t i o n
En 27 Chapter 02 Basic operation 4 MODE button
! Press to switch between the map screen and the AV operation screen.
! Press to display the map screen while the screen of navigation function is dis-
played.
! Press and hold to display the Picture Adjustment screen.
= For details, refer to Operating the pic-
ture adjustment on page 157. 5 HOME button
! Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu.
! Press to switch between the Classic Menu and the Shortcut Menu while the Top Menu is displayed.
! Press and hold to turn off the screen dis-
play. 6 VOL (+/) button Adjusts the AV (Audio and Video) source vo-
lume. 7 VOICE button Press the VOICE button to activate voice op-
erations. 8 SD card slot
= For more detailed information, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on the next page. 9 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Inserting and ejecting a disc on this page. Adjusting the LCD panel angle WARNING When opening, closing and adjusting the angle of the LCD panel, be careful not to get your finger caught. 28 En CAUTION Do not open and close the LCD panel with hands by force. This may cause malfunction. Press the OPEN CLOSE button. 1 The Monitor Setup screen appears. 2 3 Touch or to adjust the angle. Touch
. p The adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be memorized and the LCD panel will automa-
tically return to that angle the next time the LCD panel is opened or closed. Inserting and ejecting a disc WARNING
! When opening, closing and adjusting the angle of the LCD panel, be careful not to get your finger caught.
! Do not use with the LCD panel left open. If LCD panel is left open, it may result in injury in the event of an accident. CAUTION
! Do not open and close the LCD panel with hands by force. This may cause malfunction.
! Do not operate this navigation system until the LCD panel completely opens or closes. If this navigation system is operated while the LCD panel is opening or closing, the LCD panel may stop at that angle for safety.
! Do not place a glass or a can on this naviga-
tion system when the LCD panel is open. Doing so may break this navigation system. Basic operation Inserting a disc 1 The Monitor Setup screen appears. Press the OPEN CLOSE button. Touch [Open]. 2 The LCD panel opens, and the disc loading slot appears. 3 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. p Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Press the OPEN CLOSE button. 4 The LCD panel closes. Ejecting a disc 1 The Monitor Setup screen appears. Press the OPEN CLOSE button. Touch [Disc Eject]. 2 The LCD panel opens, and the disc is ejected. Press the OPEN CLOSE button. 3 The LCD panel closes. Chapter 02 B a s i c o p e r a t i o n Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card CAUTION
! To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
! If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts no liability for damages, costs or expenses arising from data loss or corruption. p This system is not compatible with Multi Media Card (MMC). p Compatibility with all SD memory cards is not guaranteed. p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some SD memory cards. Inserting an SD memory card 1 The Monitor Setup screen appears. Press the OPEN CLOSE button. Touch [SD Insert]. 2 The LCD panel opens, and the SD card slot ap-
pears. Insert an SD memory card into the SD 3 card slot. Insert it with the contact surface facing to the left and press the card until it clicks and com-
pletely locks. En 29 Chapter 02 Basic operation Press the OPEN CLOSE button. 4 The LCD panel closes, and then the navigation system restarts. Ejecting an SD memory card 1 The Monitor Setup screen appears. Press the OPEN CLOSE button. Touch [SD Eject]. 2 The following message appears. Touch [Yes]. 3 The navigation system restarts, and then the LCD panel opens. 4 Press the SD memory card until it clicks. 30 En 5 Pull out the SD memory card. Press the OPEN CLOSE button. 6 The LCD panel closes, and then the navigation system restarts. Plugging and unplugging a USB storage device CAUTION
! To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
! If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts no liability for damages, costs or expenses arising from data loss or corruption. Plugging in a USB storage device
% Plug a USB storage device into the USB connector. USB connector USB storage device p Compatibility with all USB storage device is not guaranteed. This navigation system may not achieve op-
timum performance with some USB sto-
rage devices. p Connection via USB hub is not possible. Chapter 02 B a s i c o p e r a t i o n Basic operation Unplugging a USB storage device
% Pull out the USB storage device after checking that no data is being accessed. p For more details about iPod compatibility with this navigation system, refer to the in-
formation on our website. p Connection via USB hub is not possible. Connecting and disconnecting an iPod CAUTION
! To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
! If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts no liability for damages, costs or expenses arising from data loss or corruption. Connecting your iPod Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-
tion system. p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)
(sold separately) is required for connection. 1 Pull out the USB storage device after checking that no data is being accessed. 2 Connect your iPod. Disconnecting your iPod
% Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod after checking that no data is being ac-
cessed. Flow from startup to termination 1 After a short pause, the navigation splash screen comes on for a few seconds. Start the engine to boot up the system. p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be sure to use your fingers to touch the touch panel keys. (The stylus is supplied for spe-
cial calibrations. Do not use the stylus for normal operations.) Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-
2 nate the system. The navigation system is also turned off. On first-time startup When you use the navigation system for the first time, select the language that you want to use. Start the engine to boot up the system. 1 After a short pause, the navigation splash screen comes on for a few seconds. USB connector USB interface cable for iPod En 31 Chapter 02 Basic operation Touch the language that you want to 2 use on the screen. Touch the language that you want to 3 use for the voice guidance. The navigation system will now restart. 4 Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to the conditions. Regular startup
% Start the engine to boot up the system. After a short pause, the navigation splash screen comes on for a few seconds. p The screen shown will differ depending on the previous conditions. p When there is no route, the disclaimer ap-
pears after the navigation system reboots. Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to the conditions. p If the anti-theft function is activated, you must enter your password. After unlocking the navigation system, the Top Menu ap-
pears. If you enter the navigation screen first, the disclaimer screen will appear. Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to the conditions. 32 En Basic operation Chapter 02 B a s i c o p e r a t i o n En 33 Chapter 03 How to use the navigation menu screens Screen switching overview Destination Phone menu 2 3 1 Short-cut menu Top menu AV source screen 4 Setting menu 5 6 Map screen 7 AV Operation screen 34 En How to use the navigation menu screens What you can do on each menu 1 Top Menu Press the HOME button to display the Top Menu. This is the starting menu to access the desired screens and operate the various functions. There are two types of the Top Menu.
! Classic Menu 7 AV operation screen This is the screen that normally appears when you play the AV source. Touching the icon on the top left corner displays the AV Source menu. p To return to the previous screen, touch
. Operating list screens (e.g. POI list)
! Shortcut Menu 1 Screen title 2 Returns the previous screen. 3 or on the scroll bar scrolls Touching through the list and allows you to view the re-
maining items. 2 Destination Menu 4 Listed items Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-
row down the options and proceed to the next operation. Chapter 03 H o w t o u s e t h e n a v i g a t i o n m e n u s c r e e n s You can search for your destination on this menu. You can also check or cancel your set route from this menu. 5 3 AV Source menu You can access the screen for selecting the audio and visual source to play. 4 Phone Menu You can access the screen that is related to hands-free phoning to see call histories and change the settings on the Bluetooth wireless technology connection. 5 Settings Menu You can access the screen to customize set-
tings. 6 Map screen Press the MODE button to display the naviga-
tion map screen. If all of characters cannot be displayed within the displayed area, touching the key to the right of the item allows you to see remaining characters. Shortcut menu Registering your favorite menu items in short-
cuts allows you to quickly jump to the regis-
tered menu screen by a simple touch on the Shortcut Menu screen. En 35 Chapter 03 How to use the navigation menu screens Selecting the Shortcut p Up to 15 menu items can be registered in shortcuts. Press the HOME button repeatedly to 1 display the Shortcut Menu screen. Touch [Shortcut]. 2 The Short-Cut Selection screen appears. Displaying the rear view camera image Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand side of the screen, while the map of your sur-
roundings is indicated on the right.
= For details, refer to Setting for rear view camera on page 98. Press the HOME button to display the 1 Top Menu. Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. Touch [System Settings]. 3 The System Settings screen appears. Scroll bar Touch [Back Camera]. 4 The Back Camera Settings screen appears. Touch [On] next to Camera to acti-
5 vate the camera setting. 3 New translation required. Touch [Navigation], [Phone], or [Audio/
4 Video], and then touch and hold the icon that you want to set to shortcut. 5 Move the icon to the left side of the screen, and then release it. New translation required. Canceling the Shortcut 1 to cancel the shortcut. Touch and hold the icon that you want 2 Move the icon to the right side of the screen, and then release it. 36 En How to use the map Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-
come familiar with how information appears on the map. How to read the map screen This example shows an example of a 2D map screen. 1 2 3 4 5 6 g f e d c b a Chapter 04 H o w t o u s e t h e m a p 7 8 9 p Information with the mark (*) appears only when the route is set. p Depending on the conditions and settings, some items may not be displayed. Shows the distance to the next guidance point. Touching this item enables you to hear the next guidance again. 1 Name of the street to be used (or next gui-
4 Second Maneuver Arrow*
dance point)*
2 Next direction of travel*
New translation required. When you approach a guidance point, this ap-
pears in green. Touching this item enables you to hear the next guidance again. You can select between display and non-dis-
play.
= For more details about Selecting display or non-display for Show Manuever, refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 42. 3 Distance to the guidance point*
Shows the turning direction after next and the distance to there.
= For more details about Selecting display or non-display for Show Manuever, refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 42. 5 Zoom in/Zoom out displays touch panel keys for Touching changing the map scale and the map orienta-
tion. 6 Current position En 37 Chapter 04 How to use the map Indicates the current location of your vehicle. The apex of the triangular mark indicates your orientation and the display moves automati-
cally as you drive. p The apex of the triangular mark is the proper current position. 7 Street name (or city name) that your vehi-
cle is traveling along
= For details, refer to Setting the current street name display on page 43. 8 Extension tab for the AV information bar Touching this tab opens the AV information bar and enables you to briefly view the current status on the AV source. Touching it again re-
tracts the bar. 9 Shortcut to the AV operation screen The AV Source currently selected is shown. Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-
tion screen of the current source directly. p If you connect your iPod to this naviga-
tion system, the artwork for the album that is playing appears. a Quick Access icon Displays Quick Access menu. b Map orientation indicator
! When North up is selected, played.
! When Heading up is selected, is dis-
is displayed. The red arrow indicates north. c Current route*
The route currently set is highlighted in bright color on the map. If a waypoint is set on the route, the route after the next waypoint is highlighted in another color. d Direction line*
The direction towards your destination (next waypoint, or cursor) is indicated with a straight line. e Bluetooth Connected icon This icon shows whether the device featuring Bluetooth technology is connected or not. You can select between display and non-display.
= For more details about Selecting dis-
play or non-display for the Bluetooth Connected icon, refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on page 42. 38 En f Multi-Info window Each touch of [Multi-Info window] changes the display information.
! Distance to the destination (or dis-
tance to waypoint)*
! Estimated time of arrival at your des-
tination or waypoint*
The estimated time of arrival is an ideal value calculated based on the value set for [Speed] and the actual driving speed. The estimated time of arrival is only a reference value, and does not guarantee arrival at that time.
! Travel time to your destination or waypoint*
g Current time Meaning of guidance flags
: Destination The checkered flag indicates your destination.
: Waypoint The blue flags indicate your way-
points.
: Guidance point The next guidance point (next turn-
ing point, etc.) is shown by a yel-
low flag. Displaying the AV information bar You can check the current status on the se-
lected AV source.
% Touch AV information bar appears.
# Touch the AV information bar. The AV information bar is retracted. How to use the map Enlarged map of the intersection When Close Up View in the Map Settings screen is On, an enlarged map of the inter-
section appears.
= For details, refer to Setting Close Up View on page 42. Display during freeway driving In certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-
mation is available, indicating the recom-
mended lane to be in to easily maneuver the next guidance. 1 While driving on the freeway, freeway exit numbers and freeway signs may be displayed when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits. 2 3 1 Lane information Chapter 04 H o w t o u s e t h e m a p 2 Freeway exit information Displays the freeway exit. 3 Freeway signs These show the road number and give direc-
tional information. p If the data for these items is not contained in the built-in memory, the information is not available even if there are the signs on the actual road. Operating the map screen Changing the scale of the map You can change the map scale between 25 meters and 2 000 kilometers (25 yard and 1 000 miles). 1 Display the map screen. 2 Touch and on the map screen. with the map scale appear. Touch 3 scale. or to change the map p If you do not operate the function for a few seconds, the display is automatically re-
turned.
# Touch the direct scale key to change the map to the selected scale directly. Switching the map orientation You can switch the vehicles direction on the map between Heading up and North up.
! Heading up:
En 39 Chapter 04 How to use the map The map display always shows the vehicles direction as proceeding toward the top of the screen.
! North up:
The map display always has north at the top of the screen. Touch and drag the map in the desired 2 direction to scroll. p The map orientation is fixed at North up 1 in the following situation. When the map scale is 50 kilometers (25 miles) or more. p The map orientation is fixed at Heading up in the following situation. When the 3D map screen is displayed. 1 Display the map screen. 2 Touch or on the map screen. appears. 2 1 Cursor 2 Distance from the current position Positioning the cursor to the desired location results in a brief informational overview about the location being displayed at the bottom of screen, with street name and other informa-
tion for this location being shown. (The infor-
mation shown varies depending on the position.) p The scrolling increment depends on your dragging length.
# Touch The map returns to the current position. p Pressing MODE button returns the map to the current position. Quick Access Quick Access allow you to perform various tasks, such as route calculation for the loca-
tion indicated by the scroll cursor or register-
ing a location in [Address Book], faster than using the navigation menu. You can customize Quick Access displayed on screen. The shortcuts described here are prepared as the default setting.
= For more details about Changing a short-
cut, refer to Selecting Quick Access on page 47 p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be removed from Shortcut menu. or appears. 3 Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting. p If you do not operate the function for a few seconds, the display is automatically re-
turned. Scrolling the map New translation required. 1 Display the map screen. 40 En
1 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 5.23 MiB | November 06 2009 |
Chapter 04 H o w t o u s e t h e m a p How to use the map
% When the map is displayed, touch
= For details, refer to Calling a number in the Contacts List on page 81.
[Close]
Hides the Quick Access menu. Quick Access menu
: Route Overview*
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This item can be selected only during route gui-
dance. You can modify the conditions for route calcu-
lation and recalculate the current route.
= For details, refer to Checking and modifying the current route on page 52.
: Destination*
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the route to the place specified with the scroll cur-
sor.
: Registration Register information on the location indicated by the scroll cursor to the Address Book.
= For details, refer to Registering a location by scroll mode on page 62.
: Vicinity Search Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of the scroll cursor.
= For details, refer to Searching for a nearby POI on page 58.
: Overlay POI Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI) on the map.
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the map on page 44.
: Volume Displays [Phone Volume].
= For more details about Phone Volume, refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 96.
: Contacts Displays the Contacts List screen. En 41 Chapter 05 Customizing the map screen settings The general settings related with a map screen can be customized. To customize the map screen, display the Map Settings screen. 1 Display the Top Menu screen. Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. Setting Close Up View This setting enables switching to an enlarged map around the point where your vehicle is approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of freeway or a junction.
% Touch [Close Up View]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [On] (default):
Switches to an enlarged map. Displays the close up view with the 2D map.
! [Off]:
Does not switch to an enlarged map. City Map You can select whether to display the city map when in certain metropolitan city areas.
% Touch [City Map]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [On] (default):
Automatically switches to the city map when in a city map area.
! [Off]:
Does not show the city map. p Even if you switch [City Map] to [On], city map cannot display in areas where there is no city map data. Setting the switching of the city map display Sets whether to switch to the city map display when the vehicle is within a city map area. Touch [Map Settings]. 3 The Map Settings screen appears. Setting the Item on the Map Screen CAUTION The speed limit display may not match the actual speed limit of the current road. This is not a defi-
nite value. Be sure to drive according to the ac-
tual speed limit. 1 Display the Map Settings screen. Touch [Displayed Info]. 2 The Displayed Info screen appears. 42 En Chapter 05 C u s t o m i z i n g t h e m a p s c r e e n s e t t i n g s Customizing the map screen settings
% Touch [City Map Barrier]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [On] (default):
Displays a city map when the vehicle enters the area of the city map.
! [Off]:
Displays a city map when the area dis-
played on the map falls entirely within the city map area. Show Traffic Incident Selects whether to display or hide the traffic notification icons on the map when incidents occur on your route.
% Touch [Show Traffic Incident]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [View] (default):
Displays the icons on the map.
! [Hide]:
Hides the icons on the map.
= New translation required. Bluetooth Connected Selects whether to display or hide the icon for current status of the phone connection via Bluetooth wireless technology.
% Touch [Bluetooth Connected]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [View] (default):
Displays the Bluetooth Connected icon on the map.
! [Hide]:
Hides the Bluetooth Connected icon on the map.
= For more details about Bluetooth Con-
nected icon, refer to Bluetooth Con-
nected icon on page 38. Setting the current street name display Selects whether to display or hide the street name (or city name) that your vehicle is travel-
ing along.
% Touch [Current Street Name]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [View] (default):
Displays the street name (or city name) on the map.
! [Hide]:
Hides the street name (or city name) on the map. Setting the Address Search icon display You can select whether to display the Address Book Icon on the map.
% Touch [Address Book Icon]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [On] (default):
Displays the Address Book Icon on the map.
! [Off]:
Hides the Address Book Icon on the map. 3D Landmark You can select whether to display the 3D Land-
mark on the map. p 3D Landmark only appears when the view mode is [3D View] and the map scale is set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower.
% Touch [3D Landmark]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [On] (default):
Displays the 3D Landmark on the map.
! [Off]:
Hides the 3D Landmark on the map. En 43 Chapter 05 Customizing the map screen settings Displaying maneuvers Selects whether to display or hide the next turn ahead of the vehicle on the map.
% Touch [Show Manuever]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [View] (default):
Displays the next turn ahead of the vehicle on the map.
! [Hide]:
Hides the next turn ahead of the vehicle on the map. MSN Direct New translation required.
% Touch [MSN Direct]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [View] (default):
Displays the icons on the map.
! [Hide]:
Hides the icons on the map. Displaying POI on the map Displays icons for the surrounding facilities
(POI) on the map. Displaying preinstalled POIs on the map p You can select up to 10 items from the de-
tailed category. 1 Display the Map Settings screen. Touch [Overlay POI]. 2 The Overlay POI screen appears. 44 En 3 Touch [Display] to turn it [On]. p If you do not want to display the POI icon on the map, touch [Display] to turn it [Off].
(Even if [Display] is turned [Off], the POI selection setting is retained.) Touch [POI]. 4 The Overlay POI (Main Category) screen appears. Touch the category you want to dis-
5 play. A list of subcategories under the selected main category appears.
# Touch [OK]. Returns previous screen. Touch the subcategory. 6 A red check mark appears next to the selected category. To cancel the selection, touch the entry again. Chapter 05 C u s t o m i z i n g t h e m a p s c r e e n s e t t i n g s Customizing the map screen settings
# If you want to search with more detailed cate-
gories, touch [Detail]. Touch the item and touch [OK]. When only a few types of the detailed categories are selected, blue check marks will appear. 4 Touch [Display] to turn it [On]. p If you do not want to display the POI icon on the map, touch [Display] to turn it [Off].
(Even if [Display] is turned [Off], the POI selection setting is retained.) Touch [Custom POI]. 5 The list of POI categories appears. Touch the category you want to dis-
6 play. 7 To finish the selection, touch [OK]. Switching the view mode Various types of screen displays can be se-
lected for navigation guidance. 2D map screen p When subcategory is selected, [Detail] is not available. Touch [OK]. 7 Returns previous screen. 8 To finish the selection, touch [OK]. Displaying the customized POIs Creating a customized POI is possible by using the utility program NavGate FEEDS which is available separately, on your PC.
(NavGate FEEDS will be available on our website.) Storing the customized POI properly and inserting the SD memory card enables the system to display the icons on the map screen. p You can select up to 10 items from the de-
tailed category. Insert an SD memory card into the SD 1 card slot.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. 2 Display the Map Settings screen. Touch [Overlay POI]. 3 The Overlay POI screen appears. En 45 Chapter 05 Customizing the map screen settings Setting the map color change between day and night To improve the visibility of the map during the evening, you can set the timing for changing the combination of the map color. 1 Display the Map Settings screen. Touch [Day/Night Display]. 2 Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [Automatic] (default):
You can change the colors of a map be-
tween daytime and nighttime according to whether the vehicle lights are On or Off.
! [Day]:
The map is always displayed with daytime colors. p To use this function with [Automatic], the Orange/white lead of the navigation system must be connected correctly. Changing the road color You can set the road color to bluish or reddish. 1 Display the Map Settings screen. Touch [Road Color]. 2 Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [Red] (default):
Changes to red based road colors.
! [Blue]:
Changes to blue based road colors. 3D map screen Street View Rear View 1 Display the Map Settings screen. Touch [View Mode]. 2 The View Mode screen appears. Touch the type that you want to set. 3 You can select the following types:
! [2D View] (default):
Displays the 2D map screen.
! [3D View]:
Displays the 3D map screen.
! [Street View]:
Displays the Street View screen. p This type is available when the route is set.
! [Rear View]:
Displays the rear view images. p This type is available when [Back Cam-
era Settings] is set to [On]. 46 En Chapter 05 C u s t o m i z i n g t h e m a p s c r e e n s e t t i n g s Customizing the map screen settings Displays icon for surrounding facilities
(POI) on the map.
: Volume*
Displays [Phone Volume].
: Contacts*
Displays [Phone Book].
: Whole Route Overview Displays the entire route (currently set).
: Stock Info Displays stock prices.
: Traffic On Route Displays a list of traffic information on the route.
: Traffic Events Displays a list of traffic events information.
: Day/Night Display Switches Day/Night Display setting.
: Address Book Icon Display Switches Address Book Icon setting.
4 To finish the setting, touch [OK]. Changing the setting of navigation interruption screen Set whether to automatically switch to the na-
vigation screen from the audio screen when your vehicle approaches a guidance point such as an intersection while displaying a screen other than navigation. 1 Display the Map Settings screen. Touch [AV Guide Mode]. 2 Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [On] (default):
Switches from the audio operation screen to the navigation screen.
! [Off]:
Does not switch the screen. Selecting Quick Access Select items to display on the map screen. In the list displayed on screen, the items with red checks are displayed on the map screen. Touch the item you want to display and then touch [OK] when a red check appears. You can select up to five items. 1 Display the Map Settings screen. Touch [Quick Access Selection]. 2 The Quick Access Selection screen appears. Touch the item that you want to set in 3 Quick Access. You can select the following items:
p Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that these are default or factory settings.
: Registration*
Register the information on the location in-
dicated by the scroll cursor to the Address book.
: Vicinity Search*
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of the scroll cursor.
: Overlay POI*
En 47 Chapter 06 Setting a route to your destination CAUTION For safety reasons, these route-setting functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion. To enable these functions, you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route. p Some information regarding traffic regula-
tions depends on the time when the route calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-
mation may not correspond with a certain traffic regulation when your vehicle actually passes through the location in question. Also, the information on the traffic regula-
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic regulations when driving. The basic flow of creating your route 1 apply the parking brake. Park your vehicle in a safe place, and 2 Display the Top Menu screen. Select the method of searching for your 3 destination.
= For details, refer to Searching for and select-
ing a location on page 55. Enter the information about your desti-
4 nation to calculate route. 5 Confirm the location on the map.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on the map on this page. The navigation system calculates the 6 route to your destination, and then shows the route on the map. 7 Check and decide the route.
= For details, refer to Checking the calculated route on this page. 48 En 8 Your navigation system sets the route to your destination, and the map of your surroundings appears. 9 After releasing the parking brake, drive in accordance with navigation guidance. Checking the location on the map After searching for the destination, the Loca-
tion confirmation screen appears. Location confirmation screen
% Touch [OK]. The destination is set, and then route calcula-
tion starts. p If you press MODE button during route cal-
culation, the calculation is canceled and the map display appears.
# Touch [Scroll]. The map display changes to the scroll mode. You can fine-tune the location in the scroll mode, and then you can set the location as your destination or do various operations.
# Touch [Waypoint]. The location is added to the Waypoints List screen. p If a destination is not set, [Waypoint] is not available. Checking the calculated route After the destination is set, route calculation starts. Chapter 06 S e t t i n g a r o u t e t o y o u r d e s t i n a t i o n Setting a route to your destination When the route calculation is completed, Route confirmation screen appears. Route confirmation screen Modifying the route calculation conditions You can modify the conditions for route calcu-
lation and recalculate the current route. Touch [Options] on the Route confir-
1 mation screen. The Route Options screen appears. 1 2 3 4 1 Distance to the destination 2 Travel time to your destination 3 Estimate the fuel cost to your destination
= For details, refer to Inputting the fuel consumption information for calculating the fuel cost on page 91. 4 Route calculation condition
% Touch [OK]. Sets the displayed route as your route, and starts the route guidance.
# Touch The message confirming whether to cancel the calculated route appears. Touch [Yes] to cancel the calculated route, and then the map screen appears. Display multiple routes You can select a desired route from multiple route options. Calculated routes are shown in different colors. p If you set waypoints, you cannot use the multiple route option. Touch [Multiple Route]. 1 The Multiple Route Option screen appears. Touch 2 Another route is displayed. to
. Touch the desired items to change the 2 route calculation conditions and then touch [OK]. The route is recalculated, and Route confir-
mation screen appears. Items that users can operate Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that these are default or factory settings. Route Condition This setting controls how the route should be calculated by taking into account the time or the distance or the main road. Determines which condition takes priority for route calculation.
[Fast]*:
Calculates a route with the shortest travel time to your destination as a priority.
[Short]:
Calculates a route with the shortest distance to your destination as a priority.
[Main Road]:
Calculate a route that passes major arterial road as a priority. Touch [OK]. 3 Route confirmation screen appears. En 49 Chapter 06 Setting a route to your destination Avoid Toll Road This setting controls whether toll roads (in-
cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-
count.
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include toll roads
(including toll areas).
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (includ-
ing toll areas). p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes toll road even if [On] is selected. Avoid Ferry This setting controls whether ferry crossings should be taken into account.
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include ferries.
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids ferries. p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes ferry way even if [On] is selected. Avoid Motorway This setting controls whether freeways may be included in the route calculation.
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include freeways.
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids freeways. p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes freeway even if [On] is selected. Time restrictions This setting controls whether streets or bridges have traffic restrictions during a cer-
tain time should be taken into account. p If you want to set your route to avoid opened bridges, select [On].
[On]*:
Calculate a route while avoiding streets or bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer-
tain time.
[Off]:
Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restric-
tions. 50 En p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes streets or bridges that are subject to traffic restrictions during a certain time even if [On] is selected. CAUTION If the time difference is not set correctly, the navi-
gation system cannot consider traffic regulations correctly. Set the time difference correctly (=
Refer to Setting the time difference on page 95). Learning Route The system learns the travel history of your ve-
hicle for each road. This setting controls whether or not the travel history should be taken into account.
[On]*:
Calculate the route with the travel history taken into account.
[Off]:
Calculate the route without the travel history taken into account.
[Clear]:
Clear the current travel history. Checking the current itinerary You can check the route details.
% Touch [Profile] on the Route confirma-
tion screen. The Route Profile screen appears. Adding a waypoint Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints and final destination can be sorted automati-
cally or manually. Setting a route to your destination Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List 4 screen. Route confirmation screen appears. p When you set waypoints in the route to your destination, the route up to the next waypoint will appear in light green. The rest of the route will appear in light blue.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Adding a waypoint on the next page. Touch [Waypoints] on the Route con-
1 firmation screen. The Waypoints List screen appears. Touch [Add]. 2 The Select Search Method screen appears. Search for a location. 3 After searching for a point, display it on a map, then touch [OK] to add to the Way-
points List screen. p For details, refer to Searching for and select-
ing a location on page 55. Chapter 06 S e t t i n g a r o u t e t o y o u r d e s t i n a t i o n En 51 Chapter 07 Checking and modifying the current route You can check the route details. You can also recalculate the route in different conditions. 1 Display the Top Menu screen. Touch [Destination]. 2 The Destination Menu screen appears. Touch [Route Overview]. 3 The Route Overview screen appears. Editing waypoints You can edit waypoints (locations you want to visit on the way to your destination) and recal-
culate the route so that is passes through these locations. To edit the waypoints, display the Waypoints List screen. 1 Display the Route Overview screen. Touch [Waypoint]. 2 The Waypoints List screen appears. p [Route Overview] is active only when the route is set. Checking the current itinerary You can check the route details. 1 Display the Route Overview screen. Adding a waypoint Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints and final destination can be sorted automati-
cally or manually. Touch [Profile]. 2 The Route Profile screen appears. 1 Display the Waypoints List screen. Touch [Add]. 2 The Select Search Method screen appears. p When a long distance route is calculated, your navigation system may not be able to list all roads. (In this case, the remaining roads will be shown in the list as you drive on.) Search for a location. 3 After searching for a point, display it on a map, then touch [OK] to add to the Way-
points List screen. 52 En Checking and modifying the current route Chapter 07 Touch [Sort]. 2 The Sort Waypoints screen appears. p For details, refer to Searching for and select-
ing a location on page 55. Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List 4 screen. Route confirmation screen appears. Touch [OK]. 5 The route is recalculated and the map of the current position appears. Deleting a waypoint You can delete waypoints from the route and then recalculate the route. (You can delete waypoints successively.) 1 Display the Waypoints List screen. Touch [Delete] next to the waypoint 2 that you want to delete. The touched waypoint will be deleted from the list. Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List 3 screen. Route confirmation screen appears. Touch [OK]. 4 The route is recalculated and the map of the current position appears. Sorting waypoints You can sort waypoints and recalculate the route. p You cannot sort waypoints that you have al-
ready passed. 1 Display the Waypoints List screen. Touch the waypoint or destination. 3 Put them in the desired order.
# Touch [Automatic]. You can sort the destination and waypoints auto-
matically. The system will show the nearest way-
point (distance in a straight line) from the current location as waypoint 1, and sort the other points
(including your destination) in order of distance from the waypoint 1.
# Touch [Clear]. The sorting waypoints is canceled. Touch [OK]. 4 The Waypoints List screen appears. Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List 5 screen. Route confirmation screen appears. Touch [OK]. 6 The route is recalculated and the map of the current position appears. C h e c k i n g a n d m o d i f y i n g t h e c u r r e n t r o u t e Modifying the route calculation conditions The settings related to route calculation can be customized. 1 Display the Route confirmation screen. Touch [Options]. 2 The Route Options screen appears. En 53 Chapter 07 Checking and modifying the current route p [Skip] is available only when a waypoint is set.
# Touch [No]. Returns to the previous display without deleting the route. p For details concerning operations, refer to Modifying the route calculation conditions on page 49. Canceling the route guidance If you no longer need to travel to your destina-
tion, follow the steps below to cancel the route guidance. The Destination Menu screen ap-
1 pears. Touch [Cancel Route]. 2 A message confirming the cancellation of the current route appears. Touch [Yes]. 3 The current route is deleted, and a map of your surroundings reappears.
# Touch [Skip]. The next waypoint along the route can be skipped. A new route to your destination through all re-
maining waypoints, except for the skipped way-
point, is calculated. When the route calculation is completed, Route confirmation screen appears. 54 En Searching for and selecting a location Chapter 08 CAUTION For safety reasons, these route-setting functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion. To enable these functions, you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake before setting your route. p Some information regarding traffic regula-
tions depends on the time when the route calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-
mation may not correspond with a certain traffic regulation when your vehicle actually passes through the location in question. Also, the information on the traffic regula-
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic regulations when driving. To search for a location, display the Destina-
tion Menu screen. Press the HOME button to display the 1 Top Menu. Touch [Destination]. 2 The Destination Menu screen appears. Searching for a location by address The most frequently used function is [Address Search], in which the address is specified and the destination is searched. You can select the method of searching for a location by address.
! Searching for a city name first
! Finding the location by specifying the house number To search for a location, display the Address Search screen. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Address Search]. 2 The Address Search screen appears. S e a r c h i n g f o r a n d s e l e c t i n g a l o c a t i o n Touch the key next to Country to se-
3 lect the country. If the destination is in another country, this changes the country setting. p Once the country has been selected, you only have to change countries when your destination is outside of the country you se-
lected. Touch the key next to State and 4 touch the desired state, province, or terri-
tory on the list. If the location that you want to search for is in another state, province, or territory, this changes the area setting. p Once the state, province, or territory has been selected, you only have to change states, provinces, or territories when your destination is outside of the state, province, or territory you selected. Searching for a city name first p Depending on the search results, some steps may be skipped. 1 Display the Address Search screen. Touch [City]. 2 The Enter City Name screen appears. En 55 Chapter 08 Searching for and selecting a location Touch the desired house number range. 8 The searched location appears on the map screen. Finding the location by specifying the house number p Depending on the search results, some steps may be skipped. 1 Display the Address Search screen. Touch [House #]. 2 The Enter House Number screen appears. Enter the house number and then 3 touch [OK]. The Enter Street Name screen appears. Enter the street name and then touch 4
[OK]. The Select Street screen appears. Touch the desired street. 5 The Enter City Name screen appears.
# Touch The representative location of the city appears on the map screen. Enter the city name and then touch 3
[OK]. The Select City screen appears. Touch the desired city name. 4 The Enter Street Name screen appears. Enter the street name and then touch 5
[OK]. The Select Street screen appears. Touch the desired street. 6 The Enter House Number screen appears. Enter the house number and then 7 touch [OK]. The House Number Selection screen ap-
pears. 56 En Searching for and selecting a location Chapter 08 Entering three keywords The names including the following two words below are displayed as a result:
! The words that match with both first and second keywords you entered.
! The word beginning with the third keyword. e.g. Searching East West Street. Entered key-
words EAST W WEST S Search results East West Street is searchable. East West Street is searchable. EAST WEST S East West Street is searchable. WEST STREET E W E S E WEST STREET East West Street is searchable. East West Street is not search-
able. East West Street is not search-
able. Setting up a route to your home If your home location is stored, the route home can be calculated by touching a single key. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Return Home]. 2 Location confirmation screen appears. If the home location has not been stored yet, the confirmation message appears.
# Touch [Register]. The Set Home screen appears.
= For details, refer to Registering your home S e a r c h i n g f o r a n d s e l e c t i n g a l o c a t i o n on page 94. En 57 Enter the city name and then touch 6
[OK]. The Select City screen appears. Touch the desired city name. 7 The House Number Selection screen ap-
pears.
# Touch The representative location of the city appears on the map screen. Touch the desired house number range. 8 The searched location appears on the map screen. Searching for a name by entering multiple keywords You can search for a name (such as a city name or a street name) by entering multiple keywords. p Up to three keywords can be entered. p Enter a space between keywords as you want to enter several ones. The result of search depends on the number of the entered keywords. Entering a keyword All names containing the word beginning with entered keyword are displayed as a search re-
sult. Entering two keywords The names including the following two words below are displayed as a result:
! The word that matches with the first key-
word you entered.
! The word beginning with the second key-
word. Chapter 08 Searching for and selecting a location Searching for Points of Interest (POI) Information about various facilities (Points Of Interest - POI), such as gas stations, parking lots or restaurants, is available. You can search for a POI by selecting the category (or entering the POI Name). To search for POIs, display the POI Search screen. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [POI]. 2 The POI Search screen appears. Searching for POIs by specifying a category first You can search for POIs with one touch by touching the preset category. 1 Display the POI Search screen. Touch the desired category. 2 The POI List screen appears. Touch the POI you want. 3 The searched location appears on the map screen. State code key 3 Touch the state code key and touch the desired state, province, or territory on the list. If the location that you want to search for is in another state, province, or territory, this changes the area setting.
# Touch [Country] to display the country list. If the destination is in another country, this changes the country setting. Enter the POI name and then touch 4
[OK]. The POI List screen appears. Touch the POI you want. 5 The searched location appears on the map screen.
# Touch [Sort]. Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort order. p Current order is displayed on the upper
right of the screen.
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically. Searching for a POI directly from the name of the facilities 1 Display the POI Search screen. Touch [Spell Name]. 2 The POI Name screen appears. Searching for a nearby POI You can search for POIs in your surroundings. 1 Display the POI Search screen. Touch [Near Me]. 2 POIs are divided into several categories. 58 En Searching for and selecting a location Chapter 08 Touch the category you want. 3 The POI List screen appears. p If there are more detailed categories within the selected category, repeat this step as many times as necessary. Touch the POI you want. 4 The searched location appears on the map screen. Searching for POIs around the destination p This function is available when the route is set. 1 Display the POI Search screen. Touch [Near Destination]. 2 POIs are divided into several categories. Touch the category you want. 3 The POI List screen appears. p If there are more detailed categories within the selected category, repeat this step as many times as necessary. Touch the POI you want. 4 The searched location appears on the map screen. Searching for POIs around the city You can search for POIs around a specified city. 1 Display the POI Search screen. Touch [Around City]. 2 The Enter City Name screen appears. State code key 3 Touch the state code key and touch the desired state, province, or territory on the list. If the location that you want to search for is in another state, province, or territory, this changes the area setting.
# Touch [Country] to display the country list. If the destination is in another country, this changes the country setting. Enter the city name and then touch 4
[OK]. The Select City screen appears. Touch the desired city name. 5 The POI List screen appears.
# Touch The representative location of the city appears on the map screen. Touch the category you want. 6 POIs are divided into several categories. Touch the POI you want. 7 The searched location appears on the map screen. Selecting destination from Address Book Storing locations you visit frequently saves time and effort. Selecting an item from the list provides an easy way to specify the position. p This function is not available when there is no registered location in Address Book. S e a r c h i n g f o r a n d s e l e c t i n g a l o c a t i o n En 59 Chapter 08 Searching for and selecting a location
= For details, refer to Registering a location into Address Book on page 62. The Destination Menu screen ap-
1 pears. Touch [Address Book]. 2 The Address Book List screen appears. Touch the entry you want. 3 The searched location appears on the map screen. Searching for POIs by using the data on the SD memory card Creating a customized POI is possible by using the utility program NavGate FEEDS which is available separately, on your PC.
(NavGate FEEDS will be available on our website.) Storing the customized POI properly and inserting the SD memory card enables the system to use the data for searches. Insert an SD memory card into the SD 1 card slot.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. 2 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [AVIC FEEDS]. 3 POIs are divided into several categories. Touch the category you want. 4 The Select POI screen appears. 60 En Touch the POI you want. 5 The searched location appears on the map screen. Selecting a location you searched for recently The places that you have searched for in the past are automatically stored in History. p If no location is stored in Destination His-
tory, you cannot select [History]. (If you perform a route calculation, you can select
[History].) p History can store up to 32 locations. If the entries reach the maximum, the new entry overwrites the oldest one. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [History]. 2 The Destination History List screen ap-
pears. Touch the entry you want. 3 The searched location appears on the map screen. Searching for a location by coordinates Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints the location. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Coordinates]. 2 The Coordinate Input screen appears. Searching for and selecting a location Chapter 08 Touch [East] or [West], and then enter 3 the longitude. To enter W 5012.5 for example, touch
[West], [0], [5], [0], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5]. Touch [North] or [South], and then 4 enter the latitude. To enter N 512.5 for example, touch [North],
[0], [5], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5]. Touch [OK]. 5 The searched location appears on the map screen. S e a r c h i n g f o r a n d s e l e c t i n g a l o c a t i o n En 61 Chapter 09 Registering and editing locations Registering a location into Address Book Registering a location by Address Book Address Book can store up to 400 registered locations. These can include your home loca-
tion, favorite places, and destinations you have already registered. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Address Book]. 2 The Address Book List screen appears. Touch [Add]. 3 The Select Search Method screen appears. 4 Search for a location. p For details, refer to Searching for and select-
ing a location on page 55. 5 When the map of the location you want to register is displayed, touch [OK]. The location is registered, and then the Ad-
dress Book Edit screen appears. p For details, refer to Editing the entry in Ad-
dress Book on this page. Touch [OK]. 6 The registration is completed. Registering a location by scroll mode 1 Touch and drag the screen to scroll the map to the position that you want to regis-
ter. 62 En Touch 2 menu. to display the Quick Access
. Touch 3 The location is registered, and then the Ad-
dress Book Edit screen appears. p For details, refer to Editing the entry in Ad-
dress Book on this page. Touch [OK]. 4 The registration is completed. Editing registered locations Editing the entry in Address Book 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Address Book]. 2 The Address Book List screen appears. Touch next to the location that you 3 want to edit. The Address Book Edit screen appears. Touch [Name]. 4 You can enter the desired name. p Up to 17 characters can be input for the name.
# Touch [Phone #]. You can edit the registered phone number. To dial the number, touch [Call].
# Touch [Icon]. The symbol displayed on the map and Address Book.
# Touch [Modify Location]. You can change the registered location by scrol-
ling the map. Registering and editing locations Chapter 09 Editing your home When you have already registered your home, you can edit the information of your home. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Address Book]. 2 The Address Book List screen appears. p Home location is displayed on the top of the list. Touch [Sort]. 3 Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort order. p Current order is displayed on the upper
right of the screen.
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
Sorts the items in the list in order of the re-
cently used items. Deleting the entry in Address Book 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch 3 next to the home location. The Address Book Edit screen appears. Touch [Address Book]. 2 The Address Book List screen appears. Touch [Delete]. 3 The Delete from Favourite screen appears.
# Touch [Phone #]. You can edit the registered phone number. To dial the number, touch [Call].
# Touch [Modify Location]. You can change the registered location by scrol-
ling the map. Touch [OK]. 4 The registration is completed. Sorting the entry in Address Book 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Address Book]. 2 The Address Book List screen appears. Select the location you want to delete. 4 A check mark appears by the selected loca-
tion.
# Touch [All]. En 63 R e g i s t e r i n g a n d e d i t i n g l o c a t i o n s Chapter 09 Registering and editing locations Selects all entries.
# Touch [None]. Displayed when all locations are selected. Can-
cels all selected locations. Touch [Delete]. 5 A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion. After exporting the data is finished, the follow-
ing message appears. Touch [OK]. 5 The Address Book List screen appears. Importing Address Book edited on NavGate FEEDS You can import the locations that you have edi-
ted on the utility program NavGate FEEDS which is available separately to Address Book. p When a location that is already registered in Address Book is imported, the loca-
tion is overwritten. Insert an SD memory card into the SD 1 card slot.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. 2 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Address Book]. 3 The Address Book List screen appears. Touch 4 The following message appears. Touch [Yes]. 6 The data you selected is deleted.
# Touch [No]. Cancels the deletion. Exporting and importing the entry in Address Book Exporting the entry in Address Book Exporting the Address Book data to an SD memory card for editing is possible by using the utility program NavGate FEEDS which is available separately, on your PC. Insert an SD memory card into the SD 1 card slot.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. 2 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Address Book]. 3 The Address Book List screen appears. Touch 4 Exporting the data starts. 64 En Registering and editing locations Chapter 09 Touch [Yes]. 5 Importing of the data starts. After importing the data is finished, the Ad-
dress Book List screen appears. Deleting an entry in History Items in History can be deleted. All entries in History can be deleted at once. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [History]. 2 The Destination History List screen ap-
pears. Touch [Delete]. 3 The Delete from History screen appears. Select the location you want to delete. 4 A check mark appears by the selected loca-
tion.
# Touch [All]. Selects all entries.
# Touch [None]. Displayed when all locations are selected. Can-
cels all selected locations. Touch [Delete]. 5 A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion. Touch [Yes]. 6 The data you selected is deleted.
# Touch [No]. Cancels the deletion. R e g i s t e r i n g a n d e d i t i n g l o c a t i o n s En 65 Chapter 10 Browsing information on MSN Direct If you have an active subscription to MSN Direct service, you can check and browse various information on your navigation system, such as gas prices, movie times, weather conditions and traffic information. The information will be updated periodically. Notice about MSN Direct Pioneer is not responsible for the accuracy of the MSN Direct content. The MSN Direct con-
tent may not be current or available at times, and is subject to change without notice. To re-
ceive MSN Direct content, you must subscribe to the MSN Direct service, and you must be within the MSN Direct coverage area. Cover-
age may also be affected by the availability and relative strength of FM transmissions, as well as reception limitations of Microsofts Direct-
Band network. Please visit http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer or current coverage area maps, subscription details, and other important information about MSN Direct. Activating the service You have to activate MSN Direct first. p A web-connected computer is required for the online subscription. p If you have difficulty for the online subscrip-
tion, please call toll-free 1-866-658-7032. General flow chart:
1 Check your product key. You have to know your product key for the subscription.
(Refer to Checking your product key on this page.) j 2 Make an online subscription to MSN Direct service using your PC.
(Refer to Subscribing to the MSN Direct ser-
vice on the next page.) j 3 Activate the MSN Direct service on this pro-
duct.
(Refer to Activating the MSN Direct function on the next page.) j 4 Activation is complete. Checking your product key The product key that you can find here is used in the online subscription. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. The MSN Direct screen appears. 2 Touch [Status]. 3 Write your product key down in the fol-
lowing box;
66 En Browsing information on MSN Direct Chapter 10 Subscribing to the MSN Direct service Within two days of completing the subscription, execute Activating the MSN Direct function. 1 Access the following URL and read the description. http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer 2 Be sure to check the coverage area and other availabilities of MSN Direct on the web page. 3 Go to the page for activation and enter your product key. Follow the directions on the web page 4 to complete the subscription. Activating the MSN Direct function After the online subscription, complete the ac-
tivation so that the navigation system can re-
ceive the information. This operation must be performed under the following conditions You are currently in the coverage area of MSN Direct. 1 Boot-up your navigation system. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, 2 and then touch [MSN Direct]. The MSN Direct screen appears. 3 Touch [Status]. 4 Wait until the activation status changes to Active. It may take approximately 20 or 30 minutes to complete the activation. After activation is complete, the information will be available on each menu. Browsing gas prices Recent gas prices of nearby gas stations are displayed in a list. Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates gas price information, the information provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-
tual gas prices. Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on the previous page. It may take up to 24 hours for all the data to be-
come available under the following conditions:
! When you use MSN Direct for the first time.
! When you have not performed this function previously around the current area.
! After the navigation system has been turned off for a few days. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. The MSN Direct screen appears. Touch [Gas Prices]. 2 The Gas Prices screen appears. B r o w s i n g i n f o r m a t i o n o n M S N D i r e c t Touch the desired tab to change the 3 sort order. Available options;
! [Distance] (default):
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
! [Name]:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
! [Price]:
En 67 Chapter 10 Browsing information on MSN Direct Sorts the items in the list by price.
# Touch [Refresh]. New translation required. p [Refresh] appears when new gas prices in-
formation is received. Touch on the item that you want to 4 view in detail. 1 The names of gas stations and their loca-
tions 2 Gas prices The information in ( ) shows how current the information is. 3 Distance from the current position
# Touch Location confirmation screen appears.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on the map on page 48. Touch [OK]. 5 Location confirmation screen appears.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on the map on page 48. Browsing movie times Nearby theaters can be displayed on a list. Switching the screen allows you to see the movie title now showing. 68 En Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates movie information, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual movie information. Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 66. It may take up to 6 hours for all the data to be-
come available under the following conditions:
! When you use MSN Direct for the first time.
! When you have not performed this function previously around the current area.
! After the navigation system has been turned off for a few days. Searching for a theater by selecting a movie title 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, Touch [Movie Times]. 2 The All Movie Theaters screen appears. Touch [All Movie Titles]. 3 The movie titles now showing are displayed.
# Touch [Refresh]. New translation required. p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
tion is received. Touch the desired movie title. 4 The theaters that are currently showing the se-
lected movie are displayed.
# Touch [Refresh]. New translation required. p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
tion is received. Browsing information on MSN Direct Chapter 10 Touch the desired tab to change the Touch the desired tab to change the 5 sort order. Available options;
! [Distance] (default):
3 sort order. Available options;
! [Distance] (default):
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
! [Name]:
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
! [Name]:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically. Sorts the items in the list alphabetically. Touch on the item that you want to 6 view in detail. 1 The names of theaters and their locations 2 Distance from the current position
# Touch Location confirmation screen appears.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on the map on page 48. Touch [OK]. 7 Location confirmation screen appears.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on the map on page 48.
# Touch [Dial]. Enables you to call the position if a telephone number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-
quired.) Searching for a movie title by selecting a theater 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, Touch [Movie Times]. 2 The All Movie Theaters screen appears. Touch the desired theater. 4 The movie titles currently shown on the se-
lected theater are displayed.
# Touch Location confirmation screen appears.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on B r o w s i n g i n f o r m a t i o n o n M S N D i r e c t the map on page 48.
# Touch [Refresh]. New translation required. p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
tion is received. Touch on the item that you want to 5 view in detail. Touch [OK]. 6 Location confirmation screen appears.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on the map on page 48.
# Touch [Dial]. Enables you to call the position if a telephone number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-
quired.) Browsing weather information Local weather information can be displayed on a list. Switching the screen allows you to see worldwide weather conditions. Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates weather information, the information provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-
tual weather conditions. Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 66. En 69 Chapter 10 Browsing information on MSN Direct Using traffic information You can view current traffic conditions and in-
formation. When the navigation system re-
ceives updated traffic information, it will overlay the traffic information on your map and also display detailed text information when available. In the default setting, the navigation system takes into account traffic information and tries to avoid traffic congestions and suggest better routes. Also, when you are traveling along a route and the system finds another better route for avoiding the traffic congestion, the current route will be recalculated automati-
cally. The term traffic congestion in this section in-
dicates the following types of traffic condi-
tions:
Stop-and-go traffic Stopped traffic Closed/blocked roads Viewing the traffic event Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in the form of a list. This allows you to check how many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-
cation and their distance from your current po-
sition. Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates traffic information, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 66. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. Touch [Traffic List]. 2 The Traffic Event List screen appears. The list with received traffic information is shown. Checking the local weather information 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, Touch [Weather]. 2 The local weather information is displayed. New translation required. Touch the desired area. 3 Detailed information is displayed. Touching [Forecast] displays the weather fore-
casts for these three days. Checking worldwide weather conditions 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, Touch [Weather]. 2 The local weather information is displayed. Touch [Worldwide]. 3 Worldwide weather conditions are displayed. The area name, distance and direction from current position are displayed on the list. The list is sorted alphabetically by the area name. Touch the desired area. 4 Detailed information is displayed. 70 En Browsing information on MSN Direct Chapter 10 Touching allows you to check the location on a map. (Traffic information without positional infor-
mation cannot be checked on a map.) Select an incident you want to view in 3 detail. The details of the selected incident are dis-
played. p Touching an incident you want to see allows you to view the detailed information of the incident. If the information cannot be dis-
played on one screen, touch to view the remaining information. or
# Touch [Sort]. You can sort the traffic information. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
You can sort the traffic information by dis-
tance from your current position. For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-
fic List], the list will be sorted according to the linear distance from the vehicle position to the traffic information. For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-
fic On Route], the list will be sorted accord-
ing to the distance from the vehicle position to the traffic information.
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-
betical order.
You can sort the traffic information accord-
ing to the incident. The list will be sorted in the order of closed/
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-
dents, road works and others. Current order is displayed on the upper right of the screen.
# Touch [Refresh]. When new traffic information is received, current information is changed or old information has been removed, the list is updated to reflect the new situation.
# Touch
. Touch 4 Return to the previous screen. Checking traffic information on the route All traffic information on the current route is displayed on screen in a list.
% Touch [Traffic On Route]. The Traffic On Route List screen appears. The method for checking the content dis-
played on the screen is the same for Viewing the traffic event. How to read traffic information on the map The traffic event information displayed on the map is as follows. p A line is displayed only when the map scale is 5 km (2.5 miles) or lower. p Icon appears only when the scale on the map is 20 km (10 miles) or lower. If the scale is changed, the icons are resized ac-
cording to the selected scale. Traffic event icon B r o w s i n g i n f o r m a t i o n o n M S N D i r e c t
with yellow line:
Stop-and-go traffic with red line:
Stopped traffic with black line:
Closed/blocked roads etc.:
Accidents, constructions, etc. En 71 Chapter 10 Browsing information on MSN Direct Viewing the traffic flow Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in the form of a list. This allows you to check how many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-
cation and their distance from your current po-
sition. Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates traffic information, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 66. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. Touch [Traffic Flow]. 2 A list with traffic event information that has been received is shown. Places (street names) where incidents have occurred are displayed on the list. the linear distance from the vehicle position to the traffic information. For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-
fic On Route], the list will be sorted accord-
ing to the distance from the vehicle position to the traffic information.
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-
betical order.
You can sort the traffic information accord-
ing to the incident. The list will be sorted in the order of closed/
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-
dents, road works and others. Current order is displayed on the upper right of the screen.
# Touch [Refresh]. When new traffic information is received, current information is changed or old information has been removed, the list is updated to reflect the new situation.
# Touch
. The traffic event information displayed on the map is as follows. Select an incident you want to view in 3 detail. The details of the selected incident are dis-
played. p Touching an incident you want to see allows you to view the detailed information of the incident. If the information cannot be dis-
played on one screen, touch to view the remaining information. or
# Touch [Sort]. You can sort the traffic information. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
You can sort the traffic information by dis-
tance from your current position. For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-
fic List], the list will be sorted according to 72 En Traffic flow icon and line
! Red: average speed in this area is slower than 15mph (24 km/h)
! Yellow: average speed in this area is be-
tween 15 mph to 45mph (24 km/h to 72 km/
h)
! Green: average speed in this area is faster than 45 mph (72 km/h) (An icon without a line will be displayed) Browsing information on MSN Direct Chapter 10 Selecting traffic information to display There are different types of traffic information that can be received via the MSN Direct ser-
vice, and you can select which types will be in-
corporated and displayed on your navigation system. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. Touch [Traffic Settings]. 2 The Traffic Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Displayed traffic information]. The Traffic Type Settings screen appears. Browsing local events The nearby events to be held in the next few days are displayed on a list, and you can see the detail event information. Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates local event information, the information provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-
tual local event conditions. Please refer to No-
tice about MSN Direct on page 66. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. Touch [Local Events]. 2 The Local Event Date screen appears. Touch the traffic information item to 4 display. A check mark appears by the selected traffic information. p Touching [All (None)] selects or deselects all traffic information.
# Touch [All]. Selects all traffic information.
# Touch [None]. Displayed when all traffic information are se-
lected. Cancels all selected traffic information. Touch [OK]. 5 The selected traffic information icon is added to the screen. 6 Touch [OK]. B r o w s i n g i n f o r m a t i o n o n M S N D i r e c t 3 New translation required. The Local Event Groups List screen ap-
pears. Touch the category of events that you 4 want to check. The Local Event Sub Groups List screen ap-
pears. Touch the subcategory of events that 5 you want to check. The Local Events screen appears. Touch the desired tab to change the 6 sort order. Available options;
! [Distance] (default):
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
! [Name]:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically. En 73 Chapter 10 Browsing information on MSN Direct Touch the desired event to display de-
7 tailed information of the event.
# Touch [Refresh]. New translation required. p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
tion is received. 4 Touch or to scroll the list.
# Touch Location confirmation screen appears.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on the map on page 48.
# Touch [Refresh]. New translation required. p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
tion is received. Touch [OK]. 8 Location confirmation screen appears.
= For details, refer to Checking the location on the map on page 48.
# Touch [Dial]. Enables you to call the position if a telephone number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-
quired.) Browsing news headlines Recent news headlines are displayed in a list. Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates news headlines, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to current news headlines. Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 66. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. 2 Touch [News]. Touch the desired news headline. 3 Further details about the news are displayed. 74 En Browsing information on MSN Direct Chapter 10 Browsing stock quotes Recent stock quotes are displayed in a list. Touch the desired stock quote. 3 Detailed stock quote information is displayed. Although the stock quote displayed onscreen is updated about 40 minutes (approx.), these prices are not realtime values. It may take up to 20 minutes for all the data to become available under the following condi-
tions:
! When you use MSN Direct for the first time.
! When you have not performed this function previously around the current area.
! After the navigation system has been turned off for a few days.
= Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on page 66. Selecting stock symbols Up to 30 stock symbols can be selected. Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, 1 and then touch [MSN Direct]. Touch [Add]. 2 The Stock Info screen appears. p The blank list appears when no symbols are selected. Touch [Add]. 3 The Stock Info screen appears. Enter the stock symbol that you want 4 to select, and then touch [OK]. New translation required. p Arrow in the left of each item indicates the stock price movement. If there is no stock price movements than previous close, is displayed. Viewing the detailed stock quotes 1 Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu, and then touch [MSN Direct]. 2 Touch [Add].
# Touch [Delete]. The message confirming whether to delete the entry appears. And then touch [OK] to delete the stock symbol from the Stock Info screen. B r o w s i n g i n f o r m a t i o n o n M S N D i r e c t En 75 Chapter 11 Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device If your devices feature Bluetooth technology, this navigation system can be connected to your devices wirelessly. This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth connection. p If you try to register more than 5 devices, the system will ask you to select one of the registered devices to delete.
= For details, refer to Deleting a registered device on page 78. To register your Bluetooth devices, display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Press the HOME button to display the 1 Top Menu. Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. Touch [Bluetooth Settings]. 3 The Bluetooth Settings screen appears. Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices The system searches for available Bluetooth devices near the navigation system, displays them in a list, and registers them for connec-
tion. 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices. For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology. For details, refer to the instruction manual of your devices. 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Registration]. 3 The Nearby Device List screen appears. For more information about the connectivity with the devices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology, refer to the information on our website. Preparing communication devices This navigation system has a built-in function to use devices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology.
= For details, refer to Notes for hands-free phoning on page 88. New translation required.
! HFP (Hands Free Profile)
! A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Pro-
file) p When the navigation system is turned off, the Bluetooth connection is also discon-
nected. When the system restarts, the sys-
tem automatically attempts to reconnect the previously-connected cellular phone. Even when the connection is severed for some reason, the system automatically re-
connects the specified cellular phone (ex-
cept when the connection is severed due to cellular phone operation). Registering your Bluetooth devices You need to register your devices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology when you con-
nect it for the first time. A total of 5 devices can be registered. Three registration methods are available:
! Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices
! Searching for a specified Bluetooth device
! Pairing from your Bluetooth devices 76 En Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device Chapter 11 The system searches for devices featuring Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the connection and displays them in the list if the device has found. p Up to 30 devices will be listed in the order that the devices are found. 4 Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-
pears in the list. p If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that you want to connect, check that the device is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology connection. Touch the Bluetooth device name you 5 want to register. A message prompting you to enter a PIN code appears. Searching for a specified Bluetooth device If you cannot connect your Bluetooth device using [Search devices] and [Register from mobile phone], try this method if your Blue-
tooth device is found in the list. 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices. For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology. For details, refer to the instruction manual of your devices. 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Registration]. 3 The Nearby Device List screen appears. Touch [Select specific devices]. 4 The Select specific devices screen appears. Touch the model name of the Bluetooth 5 device to be connected. The system searches for devices featuring Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the connection and displays them in the list if the device has found. Enter the PIN code 1111 using the 6 Bluetooth device. New translation required. New translation required. p New translation required. p New translation required. p New translation required. R e g i s t e r i n g a n d c o n n e c t i l n g t h e B u e t o o t h d e v i c e En 77 Chapter 11 Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device p If you cannot find the desired model name on the list, touch [Other phones] to search the devices available nearby. 4 Touch [Register from mobile phone]. The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth wireless technology connection. Touch the Bluetooth device name you 6 want to register. A message prompting you to enter a PIN code appears. 5 Register the navigation system on your Bluetooth device. If your device asks you to enter a password, enter the PIN code (password) of the naviga-
tion system. New translation required. p If registration fails repeat the procedure from the beginning. Deleting a registered device When you have already registered 5 bluetooth devices and try to add another one, you have to delete a registered device. p If a registered phone is deleted, all the phone book entries and call history lists that correspond to the phone will be also cleared. 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Registration]. 2 The following message appears. Enter the PIN code 1111 using the 7 Bluetooth device. New translation required. New translation required. p New translation required. p New translation required. p New translation required. Pairing from your Bluetooth devices You can register the Bluetooth device by set-
ting the navigation system to standby mode and requesting connection from the Bluetooth device. 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices. For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology. For details, refer to the instruction manual of your devices. 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Registration]. 3 The Nearby Device List screen appears. 78 En Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device Chapter 11 Touch [OK]. 3 The Delete From Connection List screen appears. Touch [Connection]. 3 The Connection List screen appears. Touch the Bluetooth device name that 4 you want to delete. The registration is canceled. Connecting a registered Bluetooth device The navigation system automatically connects the Bluetooth device selected as the target of connection. However, connect the Bluetooth device manually in the following cases:
! Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis-
tered, and you want to manually select the device to be used.
! You want to reconnect a disconnected Bluetooth device.
! Connection cannot be established automa-
tically for some reason. If you start connection manually, carry out the following procedure. You can also connect the Bluetooth device by having the navigation sys-
tem detect it automatically. 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices. For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless technology. For details, refer to the instruction manual of your devices. 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch the name of the device that you 4 want to connect. The Select Profile screen appears. Touch the profile that you want to con-
5 nect. You can select the following profiles:
! [Handsfree and Audio]:
Connects the device as the hands-free phone and the Bluetooth audio player.
! [Audio]:
Connects the device as Bluetooth audio player.
! [Handsfree]:
Connects the device as the hands-free phone. Connection starts. When a connection is successfully estab-
lished, a connection complete message ap-
pears, the screen returns to the map screen by touching [OK]. p To cancel the connection to your device, touch [Cancel]. p New translation required. p If connection fails, check whether your de-
vice is waiting for a connection and then re-
try. R e g i s t e r i n g a n d c o n n e c t i l n g t h e B u e t o o t h d e v i c e En 79 Chapter 12 Using hands-free phoning CAUTION For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as much as possible while driving. If your cellular phone features Bluetooth technology, this navigation system can be con-
nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using this hands-free function, you can operate the navigation system to make or receive phone calls. You can also transfer the phone book data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-
gation system. This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-
erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology on the navigation system. For more information about the connectivity with the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology, refer to the information on our website. Displaying the Phone Menu Use the Phone Menu if you connect the cel-
lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza-
tion.
= For more details of the operation, refer to Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device on page 76. Press the HOME button to display the 1 Top Menu. Touch [Phone]. 2 The Phone Menu screen appears. 2 34 5 1 80 En 1 : Name of connected cellular phone 2
: Network name of the cellular phone company 3 New translation required. 4 : Reception status of the cellular phone 5
: Battery status of the cellular phone Making a phone call You can make a phone call in many different ways. Direct dialing 1 Display the Phone Menu screen. Touch [Dial Pad]. 2 The direct dial screen appears. Touch the number keys to enter the 3 phone number. The phone number that was input is dis-
played. And then [OK] is activated.
# Touch The input number is deleted a digit at a time from the end of the number. Continuing to press this deletes all of the digits.
# Touch Return to the previous screen. 4 Touch [OK] to make a call. p To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
. 5 Touch to end the call.
1 | User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 4.25 MiB | November 06 2009 |
Using hands-free phoning Making a call home easily You can call home without taking the time to enter the phone number if the phone number has been registered. 1 Display the Phone Menu screen. Touch [Call Home]. 2 Dialing home starts. p If you have not registered your home num-
ber, a message appears. Touch [Yes] to start registration.
= For more details about Set Home, refer to How to use the navigation menu screens on page 34. Calling a number in the Contacts List After finding the entry you want to call in the Contacts List screen, you can select the number and make the call. p Before using this function, you need to set the phone number from the phone book to Contacts.
= For details, refer to Transferring the phone book on page 84. 1 Display the Phone Menu screen. Touch [Contacts]. 2 The Contacts List screen appears. Chapter 12 Alphabet tabs Makes the screen jump to the beginning of the page including the entry whose names start with any of selected alphabets. Touching [#ABCDE] also displays the page in-
cluding the entry whose names start with pri-
mary symbols or numbers. Touching [Others] displays the page including entries that are not assigned to any of the other tabs. Touch the desired entry on the list to 4 make a call.
! New translation required.
# Touch [Search]. The Contacts Name Search screen appears. New translation required.
# Touch [Delete]. The Delete from Contacts screen appears. New translation required. 5 Touch to end the call. Making a phone call using the received call history The received call history saves 30 calls per re-
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted. 1 Display the Phone Menu screen. Touch [Received Calls]. 2 The Received Calls List screen appears. U s i n g h a n d s
f r e e p h o n i n g Switch the page of the list to display 3 the desired entry. If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to the first page of the contacts whose names start with that letter. Touch an entry on the list. 3 Dialing starts. p To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
. En 81 Chapter 12 Using hands-free phoning
# Touch [Detail]. The Detail Information screen appears. You can check the details of the party before mak-
ing a phone call. 4 Touch to end the call. You can check the details of the party before mak-
ing a phone call. 4 Touch to end the call. Making a phone call using the dialed number history The dialed number history saves 30 calls per registered cellular phone. If the entries exceed 30, the oldest one will be deleted. 1 Display the Phone Menu screen. Touch [Dialled Calls]. 2 The Dialed Calls List screen appears. Making a phone call using missed call history The missed call history saves 30 calls per re-
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted. 1 Display the Phone Menu screen. Touch [Missed Calls]. 2 The Missed Calls List screen appears. Touch an entry on the list. 3 Dialing starts. p To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
# Touch [Detail]. The Detail Information screen appears. Touch an entry on the list. 3 Dialing starts. p To cancel the call after the system starts dialing, touch
# Touch [Detail]. The Detail Information screen appears. 82 En Using hands-free phoning Chapter 12 You can check the details of the party before mak-
ing a phone call. 4 Touch to end the call. Dialing GOOG-411 CAUTION Local and/or long distance charges for making a phone call may apply. You can dial GOOG-411 to dial the free busi-
ness listing service of Google with one touch. Touch [GOOG-411] on the Phone 1 Menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone Menu on page 80. Dialing GOOG-411 starts. 2 You can now use the GOOG-411 phone service. For details about GOOG-411 service and avail-
ability, contact Google. Dialing the entry in the Address Book You can make a call to the entry registered in the Address Book. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Address Book]. 2 The Address Book List screen appears. Touch next to the location that you 3 want to make a call. The Address Book Edit screen appears. Touch [Call] to make a call. 4 To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
. 5 Touch to end the call. Dialing a facilitys phone number You can make a call to facilities with phone number data. p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs that have no phone number data. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [POI]. 2 The POI Search screen appears. Search for the POI. 3 The POI List screen appears.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Searching for Points of Interest (POI) on page 58. Touch 4 The Detailed POI Information screen ap-
pears. Touch [Call] to make a call. 5 To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
. 6 Touch to end the call. Dialing from the map You can make a call by selecting the icon of a registered location or a POI icon from the map screen. p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs that have no phone number data. Scroll the map, and place the cursor on 1 an icon on the map. U s i n g h a n d s
f r e e p h o n i n g En 83 Chapter 12 Using hands-free phoning
. Touch 2 The Detailed POI Information screen ap-
pears. Touch [Call] to make a call. 3 To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
. 4 Touch to end the call. Receiving a phone call You can perform hands-free answering by using the navigation system. Answering an incoming call The system informs you that it is receiving a call by displaying a message and producing a ring sound once. If [Auto Answer Preference] is set to [Off], answer the call manually. Answering is avail-
able if any screen is displayed, such as the map screen or the setting screen. p You can set this navigation system to auto-
matically answer incoming calls.
= For details, refer to Answering a call automatically on page 86. 1 When a call comes in, the answering operation menu appears on the screen. p The registered name appears if the phone number of the received call is already regis-
tered in Contacts. p Depending on the caller ID service, the phone number of the received call may not be displayed. Unknown appears instead. 84 En 2 To answer an incoming call, touch
. New translation required.
# Touch [Vol -] or [Vol +]. You can adjust volume when you are talking.
# Touch
# New translation required. New translation required. to reject an incoming call. Touch 3 The call ends. to end the call. p If the voice on the other end of the call is too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume of the received voice.
= For more details about Phone Vo-
lume, refer to Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on page 96. p You may hear a noise when you hang up the phone. Rejecting an incoming call You can reject an incoming call.
= For details, refer to Registering your Blue-
tooth devices on page 76.
% When a call comes in, touch The call is rejected. p The rejected call is recorded in the missed call history list.
= For details, refer to Editing the device name on page 86. Transferring the phone book You can transfer the numbers in a registered user phones address book into the Contacts. Using hands-free phoning p Depending on the cellular phone, Phone Book may be called a name such as Con-
tacts, Business card or something else. p With some cellular phones, it may not be possible to transfer the entire phone book at once. In this case, transfer addresses one at a time from your phone book using your cellular phone. p The maximum 1 000 entries can be trans-
ferred per cellular phone. If the entries ex-
ceed 1 000, the extra entries will not be transferred. If more than one number is re-
gistered for one person, such as work place and home, each number is counted sepa-
rately. p Each entry can hold up to 5 phone num-
bers. p Depending on the cellular phone that is connected to this navigation system via Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-
tem may not be able to display the phone book correctly. (Some characters may be garbled.) p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, the phone book may not be correctly transferred. p The transferred data can not be edited on the navigation system. 1 Connect the cellular phone that has the phone book to transfer.
= For details, refer to Connecting a registered Bluetooth device on page 79. Touch [Contacts Transfer] on the 2 Phone Menu screen. Chapter 12 U s i n g h a n d s
f r e e p h o n i n g 3 Check that the following screen is dis-
played, and operate your cellular phone to transfer the phone book entries. New translation required. Touch [No]. 4 Transfer starts. It may take time depending on how many entries will be transferred. 5 New translation required. Transfer ends. Setting the Bluetooth Settings To set the Bluetooth Settings, display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Press the HOME button to display the 1 Top Menu. Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. Touch [Bluetooth Settings]. 3 The Bluetooth Settings screen appears. En 85 Chapter 12 Using hands-free phoning Editing the device name You can change the device name to be dis-
played on your cellular phone. (Default is
[PIONEER NAVI].) 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Device Name]. 2 The keyboard to enter the name appears. Touch 3 to delete the current name, and enter the new name by using the key-
board. Touch [OK]. 4 The name is changed. p Up to 16 characters can be entered for a de-
vice name. Editing the password You can change the password to be used for authentication on your cellular phone. (De-
fault is [1111].) p Four to eight characters can be entered for a password. 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Password]. 2 The Set Password screen appears. Touch any key to enter the password 3 you want to set and then touch [OK]. 86 En Stopping Bluetooth wave transmission You can stop transmission of electric waves by turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we recommend selecting [Off]. 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Bluetooth On/Off]. 2 Touching [Bluetooth On/Off] switching be-
tween [On] and [Off]. Echo canceling and noise reduction When you are operating hands-free phoning in the vehicle, you may hear an undesirable echo. This function reduces the echo and noise while you are using hands-free phoning, and maintains a certain sound quality. 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Echo Cancel]. 2 Touching [Echo Cancel] switches between
[On] and [Off]. Answering a call automatically The navigation system automatically answers incoming calls to the cellular phone, so you can answer a call while driving without taking your hands off the steering wheel. 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Auto Answer Preference]. 2 The Auto Answer Preference screen ap-
pears. Using hands-free phoning Chapter 12 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Clear Memory]. 2 The Clear Memory screen appears. 3 Touch the desired option.
! [Off]: No automatic response. Respond manually
! [Immediately]: Answers immediately
! [After 3 seconds]: Answers after three sec-
onds
! [After 6 seconds]: Answers after six sec-
onds
! [After 10 seconds]: Answers after ten sec-
onds Setting the automatic rejection function If this function is on, the navigation system automatically rejects all incoming calls. 1 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. Touch [Refuse All Calls]. 2 Touching [Refuse All Calls] switches between
[On] and [Off]. p If both Refuse All Calls and Auto An-
swer Preference are activated, Refuse All Calls is prioritized and all incoming calls are automatically rejected. p If Refuse All Calls is set to [On], rejected incoming calls will not be stored in the missed call list. Clearing memory You can clear the memory of each item that corresponds to the connected cellular phone:
phone book, dialed/received/missed call his-
tory list and preset dials. On this screen, you can select the following items:
! Contacts:
You can clear the registered phone book.
! Received Calls List:
You can clear the received call history list.
! Dialed Calls List:
You can clear the dialed call history list.
! Missed Calls List:
You can clear the missed call history list.
# Touch [Clear All]. It clears all the data that correspond to the con-
nected cellular phone. Touch [OK]. 3 Data on the selected item is cleared from this navigation systems memory. p If you do not want to clear memory that you have selected, touch [No]. Updating the Bluetooth wireless technology software Update files will be available for download in the future. You will be able to download the lat-
est update from an appropriate website to your PC. p Before you download the files and install the update, read through the instructions on the website. Follow the instructions on the website for steps until [Firmware Up-
date] becomes active. U s i n g h a n d s
f r e e p h o n i n g En 87 Chapter 12 Using hands-free phoning Insert an SD memory card into the SD 1 card slot.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. 2 Display the Bluetooth Settings screen. 3 Touch [Firmware Update]. The current version is displayed. Touch [Firmware Update]. 4 Update starts. Notes for hands-free phoning General notes
! Connection to all cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-
anteed.
! The line-of-sight distance between this na-
vigation system and your cellular phone must be 10 meters or less when sending and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth technology. However, the actual transmis-
sion distance may be shorter than the esti-
mated distance, depending on the usage environment.
! With some cellular phones, the speakers of the system may not produce a ring sound.
! If private mode is selected on the cellular phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-
abled. Registration and connection
! Cellular phone operations vary depending on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the 88 En instruction manual that came with your cel-
lular phone for detailed instructions.
! With cellular phones, phone book transfer may not work even though your phone is paired with the navigation system. In that case, disconnect your phone, perform pair-
ing again from your phone to the naviga-
tion system, and then perform the phone book transfer. Making and receiving calls
! You may hear a noise in the following situa-
tions:
When you answer the phone by using the button on the phone. When the person on the other end of line hangs up the phone.
! If the person on the other end of the phone call cannot hear the conversation due to an echo, decrease the volume level for hands-
free phoning. This may reduce the echo.
! With some cellular phones, even if you press the accept button on the cellular phone when a call comes in, hands-free phoning may not be performed.
! The registered name appears if the phone number of the received call is already regis-
tered in the phone book. When one phone number is registered under different names, the name that comes first alphabe-
tically is displayed.
! If the phone number of the received call is not registered in the phone book, the phone number of the received call appears. The received call history and the dialed number history
! Calls made or editing performed only on your cellular phone will not be reflected to the dialed number history or phone book in the navigation system.
! You cannot make a call to the entry of an unknown user (no phone number) in the re-
ceived call history.
! If calls are made by operating your cellular phone, no history data will be recorded in the navigation system. Using hands-free phoning Phone book transfers
! If there are more than 1 000 phone book en-
tries on your cellular phone, all entries may not be able to be downloaded completely.
! With some cellular phones, it may not be possible to transfer all items in the phone book at one time. In this case, transfer items one by one from your cellular phone.
! Depending on the cellular phone, this navi-
gation system may not display the phone book correctly. (Some characters may be garbled, or first name and last name may be in reverse order.)
! If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, the phone book may not be transferred correctly. (Image data can-
not be transferred from the cellular phone.)
! Depending on the cellular phone, phone book transfer may not be available. Chapter 12 U s i n g h a n d s
f r e e p h o n i n g En 89 Chapter 13 Customizing preferences The options in the Navi Settings menu Displaying the Navi Settings screen 1 Top Menu. Press the HOME button to display the Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. Touch [Navi Settings]. 3 The Navi Settings menu appears. Checking the connections of leads Check that leads are properly connected be-
tween the navigation system and the vehicle. Please also check whether they are connected in the correct positions. 1 Display the Navi Settings screen. Touch [Connection Status]. 2 The GPS Status screen appears. 1 Speed Pulse The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-
gation system is shown. [0] is shown while the vehicle is stationary. 90 En 2 GPS Aerial Indicates the connection status of the GPS antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from how many satellites the signal is received. If the signal is received correctly, [OK] is dis-
played. If reception is poor, [NOK] appears. In such case, please change the installation position of the GPS antenna. Color Orange Yellow Signal com-
munication Used in posi-
tioning Yes Yes Yes No 3 Hand brake When the parking brake is applied, [On] is displayed. When the parking brake is re-
leased, [Off] is displayed. 4 Power Voltage The power voltage (reference value) pro-
vided from the vehicle battery to the naviga-
tion system is shown. If the voltage goes out of the range from 11 V to 15 V, check that power cable connection is correct. 5 Illumination When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-
hicle are on, [On] is displayed. When the small lamps of a vehicle are off, [Off] is dis-
played. (If the orange/white lead is not con-
nected, [Off] appears.) 6 Back Signal When the gear lever is shifted to R, the signal switches to [High] or [Low]. (One of these is displayed depending on the vehi-
cle.) Checking sensor learning status and driving status p The navigation system can automatically use its sensor memory based on the outer dimensions of the tires. 1 Display the Navi Settings screen. Touch [3D Calibration Status]. 2 The 3D Calibration Status screen appears. Customizing preferences 1 Distance Driving distance is indicated. 2 Speed Pulse Total number of speed pulses is indicated. 3 Learning Status Current driving mode is indicated. 4 Degree of learning Sensor learning situations for distance
(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn
(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D Detec-
tion) are indicated by the length of bars. p When tires have been changed or chains fitted, turning on the Speed Pulse allows the system to detect the fact that the tire diameter has changed, and automatically replaces the value for calculating distance. p If ND-PG1 is connected, the distance calculation value cannot be replaced automatically. 5 Speed The speed detected by the navigation sys-
tem is indicated. (This indication may be different from the actual speed of your vehi-
cle, so please do not use this instead of the speedometer.) 6 Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational speed Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed when your vehicle turns to left or right is shown. 7 Inclination Degree of slope of the street that you are currently running is indicated. Chapter 13 C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s Clearing status You can delete the learned results stored in
[Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-
tus]. Touch [Distance] or [Speed Pulse]. 1 The following message appears. Touch [Yes]. 2 Clears the learned results stored in [Distance]
or [Speed Pulse]. Touch [Learning Status]. 3 The following message appears. Touch [All]. 4 Clears all learning statuses. p Touch [All] for the following cases:
After changing the installation position of the navigation system After changing the installation angle of the navigation system After moving the navigation system to another vehicle
# Touch [Distance]. Clears the learned results stored in [Distance]. p When the distance accuracy is low, touch
[Distance]. Using the Gas Mileage function Inputting the fuel consumption information for calculating the fuel cost You can estimate the fuel cost to your destina-
tion by entering the fuel consumption informa-
tion in the navigation system. 1 Display the Navi Settings screen. Touch [Gas Mileage]. 2 The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears. En 91 Chapter 13 Customizing preferences Enter the fuel consumption informa-
3 tion. Enter the following items:
! [Surface Road Gas Mileage]:
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on the or-
dinary road. p The entering the fuel cost depends on the setting of [Gas Unit]. When [Gas Unit] is set to [Liter]. Enter how much fuel you need to tra-
vel 100 kilometers (60 miles). When [Gas Unit] is set to [Gallon]. Enter how many kilometers (miles) you get to a gallon.
! [Freeway Gas Mileage]:
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on the freeway. p The entering the fuel cost depends on the setting of [Gas Unit]. When [Gas Unit] is set to [Liter]. Enter how much fuel you need to tra-
vel 100 kilometers (60 miles). When [Gas Unit] is set to [Gallon]. Enter how many kilometers (miles) you get to a gallon.
! [Gasl Price Per Unit]:
Enter the fuel unit price.
! [Gas Unit]:
Set the fuel unit.
! [Currency]:
Set the unit of currency. When all the items are entered, inputting the fuel consumption information is complete. Entering the fueling information When you enter the fueling information to the navigation system, and export the data to SD 92 En memory cards, you can check the fuel con-
sumption information by using the utility pro-
gram NavGate FEEDS which is available separately, on your PC. p Up to 24 sets of Gas Mileage Manage-
ment entries can be stored. You can also export the data, as described below. If the entries reach the maximum number, a new entry will overwrite the oldest one. Gas Mileage Management function only as-
sists you to calculate your average mileage based on the information you input. The func-
tion does not receive data directly from the ve-
hicle. 1 Display the Navi Settings screen. Touch [Gas Mileage]. 2 The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears. Touch [Gas Price Calculation]. 3 The Gas Price Calculation screen appears. 4 Enter the following settings:
! [Distance]:
Enter the distance traveled since the pre-
vious fueling. Customizing preferences p The distance is entered automatically only when the distance traveled since the previous fueling is recorded.
! [Gas Pumped]:
Enter the amount of fuel pumped.
! [Gas unit price]:
Enter the fuel unit price. When all the items are entered, the fuel con-
sumption is displayed next to Gas Mileage. Touch [OK]. 5 The Gas Price Calculation screen appears. And then touch [OK] to display the Gas Mile-
age Setting screen. Exporting the data of Gas Mileage Management Exporting the Gas Mileage Management data to an SD memory card is possible. p The data stored in this navigation system will be cleared as exporting it to the SD memory card. Insert an SD memory card into the SD 1 card slot.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. 2 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Gas Mileage]. 3 The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears. Chapter 13 C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s Touch [Export]. 4 After a message confirming whether to export the data appeared, exporting the data to the SD memory card starts. The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears when it is done. Recording your travel history Activating the track logger enables you to re-
cord your driving history (called track log below). You can review the travel history later. p If an SD memory card is inserted into the SD card slot, the track logs will be stored in the SD memory card. Insert an SD memory card into the SD 1 card slot.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. 2 Display the Navi Settings screen. Touch [Drive Log Settings]. 3 The Drive Log Settings screen appears. Touch [Drive Log Settings]. 4 Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [On]:
You can export your track log to the SD card.
! [Off] (default):
You cannot export your track log to the SD card.
# Touch [Type]. Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting. En 93 Chapter 13 Customizing preferences
! [Private] (default):
Set the track log attribute to Private.
! [Business]:
Set the track log attribute to Business.
! [Other]:
Set the track log attribute to Other. p If you travel while the setting is [On], the track logs are kept storing in the inserted SD memory card. Using the demonstration guidance This is a demonstration function for retail stores. After a route is set, touching this key starts the simulation of route guidance. 1 Display the Navi Settings screen. Touch [Demo Mode]. 2 Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [On]:
Repeat demo drive.
! [Off] (default):
Demo Mode is set off. 3 Display the map screen. The demonstration guidance will begin. Registering your home Registering your home position saves time and effort. Also, routes to home positions can be calculated easily with a single touch of the key from the Destination Menu. The regis-
tered home position can also be modified later. 1 Display the Navi Settings screen. Touch [Set Home]. 2 The Set Home screen appears. 94 En Touch [Home]. 3 The Select Search Method screen appears.
# Touch [Phone #]. When you have already registered your home, you can edit your home number. Search for a location. 4 After searching for a point, display it on a map, then touch [OK]. The location is registered, and then the Ad-
dress Book Edit screen appears. p For details, refer to Searching for and select-
ing a location on page 55. Touch [OK]. 5 The registration is completed. Correcting the current location Touch the screen to adjust the current position and direction of the vehicle displayed on the map. 1 Display the Navi Settings screen. 2 Touch [Modify Current Location]. Scroll to the position where you want 3 to set, then touch [OK]. Options on the System Settings menu Displaying the System Settings screen 1 Top Menu. Press the HOME button to display the Customizing preferences Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. 3 Display the Settings Menu screen. Touch [System Settings]. 4 The System Settings screen appears. Customizing the regional settings 1 Display the System Settings screen. Touch [Regional Settings]. 2 The Regional Settings screen appears. Chapter 13 C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s Touch [Voice language]. 4 The Voice Language Selection screen ap-
pears. Touch the desired language. 5 After the language is selected, the screen re-
turns to the previous screen. Touch [OK] on the Regional Settings 6 screen. The navigation system restarts. A message confirming whether to restart the navigation system appears. Setting the time difference Adjusts the systems clock. Set the time differ-
ence (+, ) from the time originally set in your navigation system. 1 Display the Regional Settings screen. Touch [Time]. 2 The Time Settings screen appears. Selecting the language You can set the languages used on the pro-
gram and voice guidance. Each language can be set separately. 1 Display the Regional Settings screen. Touch [Program language]. 2 The language list is displayed. Touch the desired language. 3 After the language is selected, the screen re-
turns to the previous screen. To set the time difference, touch [+] or 3
[]. The time difference between the time origin-
ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-
dard Time) and the current location of your vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time difference. Touching [+] or [] changes the time difference display in one-hour incre-
ments. The time difference can be set from 4 to +9 hours. Touch [Summer Time]. 4 If necessary, set to summer time. En 95 Chapter 13 Customizing preferences Summer time is off by default. Touch [Sum-
mer Time] to change the time if you are in the summer time period. This turns the display below summer time [On]. Touch [Time format]. 5 Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [24H]:
Switching the display for 24 hours.
! [12H]:
Switching the display for 12 hours with am/
pm. 3 Touch [+] or [] to set the speed. p The estimated time of arrival is not necessa-
rily estimated based on this speed value. Changing the unit between km and miles This setting controls the unit of distance and speed displayed on your navigation system. 1 Display the Regional Settings screen. Touch [km / mile]. 2 Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [km] (default):
Show distance in kilometers.
! [mile]:
Show distance in miles.
! [Mile&Yard]:
Show distance in miles and yards. Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle When calculating the expected time of arrival and the number of hours to the destination, set the average speed for the freeway or ordin-
ary roads using [+] and []. 1 Display the Regional Settings screen. Touch [Speed]. 2 The Average Speed Settings screen ap-
pears. 96 En Touch [OK]. 4 The settings are completed. Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone The sound volume for the navigation can be set. You can separately set the volume of the route guidance and the beep sound. 1 Display the System Settings screen. Touch [Volume]. 2 The Volume Settings screen appears. Touch [Beep]. 3 Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
! [On] (default):
A beep sounds.
! [Off]:
Muting the beep sound. Touch [+] or [] to set their volume. 4 On this screen, you can operate the following items. Customizing preferences
! [Guidance]
This setting controls the guidance volume of navigation. p When set to When set to
, guidance is output.
, no guidance is output.
! [Phone Ringtone]
This setting controls the incoming ring tone volume.
! [Phone Voice]
This setting controls the incoming voice vo-
lume. p Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice adjust-
ments are related to the cellular phone fea-
turing Bluetooth technology. No adjustment is needed when the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology is not connected. p Volume of the audio source is adjusted by VOL (+/) button of the navigation system. Chapter 13 C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s p Splash screen images should be used with-
in the following formats;
BMP or JPEG files Allowable horizontal and vertical size are 1944 pixels x 2592 pixels or smaller Allowable data size is 6 MB or smaller p Proper compatibility with allowable files is not guaranteed. p Imported original images will be stored in the built-in memory, but the ability to save these images cannot be guaranteed com-
pletely. If your original image data is de-
leted, insert the SD memory card again and re-import the original image. 1 Create a folder named PC on the top-
most directory of the SD memory card, and then create a folder named Pictures on the PC. 5 To finish the setting, touch [OK]. 2 Store the picture files in Pictures. Changing the splash screen You can change the splash screen to the other images stored in the navigation system. 1 Display the System Settings screen. Touch [Splash Screen]. 2 The Select Splash Screen screen appears. Touch the image to use as the splash 3 screen from the list. The image is displayed on the screen. Touch [OK]. 4 The image is set as the splash screen, and the system returns to the System Settings menu. Changing to the splash screen stored in the SD memory card You can change the splash screen that ap-
pears when the navigation system starts. Copy your chosen image to the SD memory card, and select the image to import. Insert an SD memory card into the SD 3 card slot.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. 4 Display the System Settings screen. Touch [Splash Screen]. 5 The Select Splash Screen screen appears. Touch [Import from SD]. 6 The Splash Screen Selection(SD) screen ap-
pears. Touch the image to use as the splash 7 screen from the list. The image is displayed on the screen. Touch [OK]. 8 The image is set as the splash screen, and the system returns to the System Settings menu. En 97 Chapter 13 Customizing preferences Setting for rear view camera The following two functions are available. The rear view camera feature requires a separately sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-
tails, consult your dealer.) Rear view camera The navigation system features a function that automatically switches to the full-screen rear view camera image installed on your vehicle. When the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) po-
sition, the screen automatically switches to full-screen rear view camera. Camera for Rear view mode
[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g. when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a split screen where map information is partially displayed. Please be aware that with this set-
ting, camera image is not resized to fit, and that a portion of what is seen by the camera is not viewable. CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the screen image may appear reversed. p Immediately verify whether the display changes to a rear view camera image when the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R) from another position. p When the screen changes to full-screen rear view camera image during normal driving, switch to the opposite setting in
[Polarity]. 1 Display the System Settings screen. Touch [Back Camera]. 2 The Back Camera Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Camera] to turn it [On]. p You can only switch to Rear View if this setting is [On]. 98 En Touch [Battery] or [GND] next to 4 Polarity to select the appropriate polarity setting.
! Battery When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is positive while the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position
! GND When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position Adjusting the response positions of the touch panel
(touch panel calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po-
sitions of the touch panel screen. p Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen, which could damage the screen. 1 Display the System Settings screen. Touch [Screen Calibration]. 2 A message confirming whether to start the ca-
libration appears. 3 Gently touch the center of + mark dis-
played on the screen. The target indicates the order. After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-
tion data is saved. p Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data.
# Press the MODE button. Returns to the previous adjustment position.
# Press and hold the MODE button. Cancels the adjustment. Setting the illumination color The illumination color can be selected from 11 different colors. Furthermore, the illumination color can switched between these 11 colors in order. Customizing preferences To set the illumination color, display the Illu-
mination Color screen. 1 Display the System Settings screen. Touch [Illumi Color]. 2 The Illumination Color screen appears. Selecting the color from the preset colors 1 Display the Illumination Color screen. Touch the color you want. 2 Available options;
! Colored keys Selects the desired preset color
! Memory 1/Memory 2/Memory 3 Col-
ors registered in the memory
= For details, refer to Creating a user-de-
fined color and storing it to memory on this page.
! Scan Shifts between the eight default colors in sequence gradually. Creating a user-defined color and storing it to memory You can create a user-defined color and set it as the illumination color. 1 Display the Illumination Color screen. Touch [Custom]. 2 The Illumination Color screen appears. Chapter 13 C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s p If [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-
lected. Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the values for 3 Red, Green and Blue to create a favorite color. Watch the illumination of hardware keys while adjusting the color. Each time you touch [+] or [-] increases or de-
creases the value of the selected item. +31 to
+00 is displayed as the value is increased or decreased. p An entry cannot be stored with all of the va-
lues set to +00. Touch [Memory 1], [Memory 2] or 4
[Memory 3] to store the illumination color. Touch [OK] to return to the previous 5 screen. Checking the version information 1 Display the System Settings screen. Touch [Service Information]. 2 The Service Information Screen screen ap-
pears. 3 Check the version information. Replicating the settings You can import settings you have made on the utility program NavGate FEEDS which is available separately to the navigation system. En 99 Chapter 13 Customizing preferences Insert an SD memory card into the SD 1 card slot.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. Press the HOME button to display the 2 Top Menu. Touch [Settings]. 3 The Settings Menu screen appears. Touch [Setting Rplctr]. 4 A message confirming whether to update the settings appears. Touch [Yes]. 5 Update starts. After updating the settings is finished, a mes-
sage confirming whether to restart the naviga-
tion system appears. Touch [OK]. 6 The navigation system restarts. Turning off the screen By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen, you can turn off the screen display without turning off the voice guidance.
% Touch [Screen Off] on the System Set-
tings menu.
= For details, refer to Display the Settings Menu screen. on page 95. The screen is turned off. p Touch anywhere on the screen to turn it back on. 100 En Using the radio (FM) You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations for radio (FM).
% Touch [FM] on the AV Source menu to display the FM screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Reading the screen 1 2 43 65 7 8 9 a 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1 to FM3. 3 Signal level indicator 4 Preset number indicator Shows what preset item has been selected. 5 Frequency indicator 6 Current time 7 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 8 STEREO indicator Shows that the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. Chapter 14 U s i n g t h e r a d i o
F M
) Using the touch panel keys 1 2 3 4 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on the next page. 2 Select a preset channel
[c] or [d] can be used to switch preset chan-
nels. 3 Perform manual tuning To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The frequencies move up or down one step at a time. Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or
[d] for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is found. p You can cancel seek tuning by touching either [c] or [d] briefly. p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you can skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-
lease the keys. p You can also perform these operations by using TRK (c/d) button. 4 Select an FM band Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM band is displayed, FM1, FM2 or FM3. p This function is convenient for preparing different preset lists for each band. En 101 Chapter 14 Using the radio (FM) Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display You can switch the left side of the basic screen according to your preference. 2 The next time you touch the same pre-
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station frequencies are recalled from memory. p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]
to [P6]. Using the Function menu 1 display the FM screen. Touch [FM] on the AV Source menu to
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 2 Touch
. 1 2 1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies
= For details, refer to this page. 2 Tuning in strong signals
= For details, refer to the next page. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to these frequencies with the touch of a key. 1 Touch [BSM].
% Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]). Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes the detailed information display or preset list display. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall (also with the touch of a key). Preset tuning keys 1 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory, touch and hold a preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-
set number (e.g., P. 1) is appears. The selected radio station has been stored in memory. p Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three FM bands, as well as 6 AM stations can be stored in memory. 102 En Using the radio (FM) Touch [Start] to start BSM. 2 BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When this is complete, BSM stops flashing. p To cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop]. p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have already saved by using [P1] to [P6]. Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Touch [Local]. Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on. 2 To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off]. Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
3 sitivity. There are four levels of sensitivity for FM. Level: 1 2 3 4 p The level 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive weaker stations. Chapter 14 U s i n g t h e r a d i o
F M
) En 103 Chapter 15 Using the radio (AM) You can listen to the radio using this naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations for radio (AM).
% Touch [AM] on the AV Source menu to display the AM screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Reading the screen 1 432 65 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 LOCAL indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 3 Signal level indicator 4 Preset number indicator Shows what preset item has been selected. 5 Frequency indicator 6 Current time Using the touch panel keys 1
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on the next page. 2 Select a preset channel c or d can be used to switch presets. 3 Perform manual tuning To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The frequencies move up or down one step at a time. Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or
[d] for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is found. p You can cancel seek tuning by touching either [c] or [d] briefly. p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you can skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-
lease the keys. p You can also perform these operations by using TRK (c/d) button. Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display You can switch the left side of the basic screen according to your preference. 2 3
% Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]). Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes the detailed information display or preset list display. 1 Display the Function menu 104 En Using the radio (AM) Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall (also with the touch of a key). Preset tuning keys 1 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory, touch and hold a preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-
set number (e.g., P. 1) is appears. The selected radio station has been stored in memory. 2 The next time you touch the same pre-
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station frequencies are recalled from memory. p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]
to [P6]. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [AM] on the AV Source menu to display the AM screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 2 Touch
. 1 2 Chapter 15 U s i n g t h e r a d i o
A M
) 1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies
= For details, refer to this page. 2 Tuning in strong signals
= For details, refer to this page. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to these frequencies with the touch of a key.
% Touch [Start] to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When this is complete, BSM stops flashing. p To cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop]. p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have already saved by using [P1] to [P6]. Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on. 1 To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off]. 2 sitivity. There are two levels of sensitivity for AM. Level: 1 2 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
p The level 2 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive weaker stations. En 105 Chapter 16 Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio) You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations for HD Radio. p For details concerning operation, refer to the HD Radio tuners operation manual. Using the touch panel keys 1
% Touch [Digital Radio] on the AV Source menu to display the Digital Radio screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 2 3 4 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on the next page. 2 Select a preset channel
[c] or [d] can be used to switch presets chan-
nels. 3 Perform manual tuning To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The frequencies move up or down one step at a time. Perform seek tuning To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or
[d] for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is found. p You can cancel seek tuning by touching either [c] or [d] briefly. p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you can skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-
lease the keys. p You can also perform these operations by using TRK (c/d) button. 4 Select a band Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired band is displayed: FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM. p This function is convenient for preparing different preset lists for each band. Reading the screen 1 32 4 65 7 8 9 a b 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset item has been selected. 4 Multicasting indicator Shows the number of multicast channels in the current frequency. 5 Frequency indicator 6 Current time 7 Detailed information
= For details, refer to Switching the display on the next page. 8 Signal level indicator 9 Blending mode indicator
= For details, refer to Switching the re-
ception mode on page 108. a Signal type indicator Shows the type of signal currently being re-
ceived. If a digital broadcasting is received, D appears. Otherwise, A appears. b Seek type indicator
= For details, refer to Switching the seek mode on page 108. 106 En Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio) Chapter 16 Switching between the detailed information display and the preset list display You can switch the left side of the basic screen according to your preference. 2 The next time you touch the same pre-
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station frequencies are recalled from memory. p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]
to [P6].
% Touch [List] (or [Detail]). Each touch of [List] (or [Detail]) changes the detailed information display or preset list dis-
play. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall (also with the touch of a key). Preset tuning keys 1 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory, touch and hold a preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-
set number (e.g., P. 1) stops flashing. The selected radio station has been stored in memory. Switching the display Desired information can be displayed.
% Touch [Disp]. Touch [Disp] repeatedly to switch between the following settings:
Channel name Artist name Song title Program type p Only when the tuner has been tuned in to an HD Radio broadcasting, display can be changed. p When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD Radio broadcasting, default display is chan-
ged into station name instead of frequency.
# Touch and hold [Disp]. New translation required. U s i n g t h e H D R a d i o
D g i t a i l R a d o
) i Using the Function menu Touch [Digital Radio] on the AV 1 Source menu to display the Digital Radio screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 2 Touch [Func]. 1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies
= For details, refer to the next page. 2 Switching the seek mode
= For details, refer to the next page. 3 Tuning in strong signals
= For details, refer to the next page. En 107 Chapter 16 Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio) Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
2 sitivity. There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM:
FM: 1 2 3 4 AM: 1 2 p The FM 4 (AM 2) setting allows recep-
tion of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive weaker sta-
tions. Switching the reception mode If a digital broadcast reception condition gets poor, the tuner automatically switches to the analog broadcast of the same frequency level in default. If you want to prevent a frequent automatic switching, switch this setting to
[Analog].
% Touch [Blending] to switch the recep-
tion mode.
! [Analog]:
! [Auto]:
Receives analog broadcasting only. Automatically switches to the analog broad-
cast of the same frequency level as the digi-
tal broadcast. p If you select Analog on this setting while
[Seek] is set to HD, the setting on [Seek]
turns to All automatically. 4 Switching the reception mode
= For details, refer to this page. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to these frequencies with the touch of a key.
% Touch [Start] to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When this is complete, BSM stops flashing. p To cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop]. p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have already saved by using [P1] to [P6]. Switching the seek mode You can select the method of seek tuning.
% Touch [Seek] to select the desired set-
ting.
! [All]:
! [HD]:
Seeks stations from both analog and digital broadcasting. Seeks from digital broadcasting only. p If you select HD on this setting while
[Blending] is set to Analog, the setting on [Blending] turns to Auto automati-
cally. Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on. 1 To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off]. 108 En Playing audio CDs You can play a normal music CD using the built-in drive of the navigation system. This section describes how. Insert the disc you want to play into 1 disc-loading slot. Playback starts from the first track of the CD. Touch [DISC] on the AV Source menu 2 to display the CD screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the disc. Reading the screen 1 2 3 54 6 7 8 9 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track currently play-
ing. 3 Playback condition indicator The marks shown below appears and indi-
cates the current playback condition.
: Scan play
: Random play
: Repeat play Indicator Meaning Disc Repeat Track Repeat All tracks in the current disc are played repeatedly. This is the default condition. The current track is played repeatedly. Chapter 17 P l a y i n g a u d i o C D s Disc Random Disc Scan All tracks in the current disc are played in random order. The beginning of each track is played for about 10 sec-
onds.
= For more information, refer to Using the Function menu on page 132. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current track. 5 Current time 6 Song number indicator New translation required. 7 Track title indicator Shows the title of the track currently playing
(when available). 8 Artist name indicator Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available). 9 Album title indicator Shows the title of the album for the current track (when available). Using the touch panel keys Touch panel keys 1 2 3 4 5 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on the next page. 2 Switch the media file type played
= For details, refer to Switch the media file type played on page 112. 3 Skip the track forward or backward Touching [p] skips to the start of the next track. Touching [o] once skips to the start of the current track. Touching it again will skip to the previous track. Fast reverse or forward En 109 Chapter 17 Playing audio CDs Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind or fast forward. p Fast reverse is canceled when it reaches the beginning of the first track on the disc. p You can also perform these operations by using TRK (c/d) button. 4 Playback and Pause Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. 5 Shuffle All All of the songs in the disc can be played at random by touching only one key. p To cancel random play, switch [Ran-
dom] to [Off] on the Function menu. Selecting a track from the list The list lets you see the list of track titles on a disc and select one of them to play. 1 2 Touch [List]. Touch the track you want to play. The track currently playing is highlighted. Touching next or previous page in the list. switches the selection to the or p The mark is displayed if there is no cor-
responding information. To return to the previous screen, touch 3
[Detail]. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [DISC] on the AV Source menu to display the CD screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 110 En 2 Touch
. 1 2 3 4 1 Repeating play Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting as follows:
! Disc Repeats the current disc
! Track Repeats just the current track p If you perform track search or fast for-
ward/rewind, repeat play is automati-
cally canceled. 2 Play tracks in a random order Touching [Random] switches between [On]
and [Off]. 3 Scan tracks of a CD Touching [Scan] switches between [On]
and [Off]. Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. When you find the track you want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off. p After scanning is finished, normal play-
back of the tracks will begin again. 4 Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automa-
tically enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound. Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes the setting as follows:
! Mode 1 Activates advanced sound retriever function.
! Mode 2 Activates advanced sound retriever function.
! Off Deactivates advanced sound re-
triever function. p MODE 2 is more effective than MODE 1. Playing music files on ROM You can play a disc that contains compressed audio files using the built-in drive of the navi-
gation system. This section describes these operations. p In the following description, the MP3, WMA, AAC files are collectively referred to as Compressed audio file. Insert the disc you want to play into 1 disc-loading slot. Playback starts from the first file of the ROM. Touch [DISC] on the AV Source menu 2 to display the ROM screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 3 Use this ROM screen to play the disc.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel keys on the next page. Reading the screen 1 2 3 5 64 7 8 9 a b c 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 3 Folder name indicator Shows the folder name currently playing. 4 Track indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 5 Playback condition indicator The marks shown below appears and indi-
cates the current playback condition.
: Scan play
: Random play
: Repeat play Chapter 18 P l a y i n g m u s i c f i l e s o n R O M Indicator Meaning Disc Repeat Folder Repeat Track Repeat Disc Random Folder Random Disc Scan Folder Scan All audio files in the disc are played repeatedly. This is the default condition. The current folder is played repeatedly. The current file is played re-
peatedly. All audio files in the current disc are played in random order. All audio files in the current folder are played in random order. The beginning of each audio file is played for about 10 seconds. The beginning of each file in the current folder is played for about 10 seconds.
= For more information, refer to Using the Function menu on page 132. 6 File type indicator Shows the type of audio file currently playing. 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current track. 8 Current time 9 Track number indicator New translation required. a Track title indicator Shows the title of the track currently playing
(when available). p New translation required. b Artist name indicator Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available). c Album title indicator Shows the title of the album for the current track (when available). En 111 Chapter 18 Playing music files on ROM Using the touch panel keys 1 2 3 4 5 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on this page. 2 Switch the media file type played When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types, you can switch be-
tween media files types to play. Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between the following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) ROM (com-
pressed audio file) DivX (DivX video files) p This touch panel key appears only when playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types. 3 Skip the track forward or backward Touching [p] skips to the start of the next track. Touching [o] once skips to the start of the current track. Touching it again will skip to the previous track. Fast reverse or forward Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind or fast forward. p Fast rewind stops when it reaches the beginning of the first file on the repeat range. p In the case of compressed audio files, there is no sound on fast rewind or for-
ward. p You can also perform these operations by using TRK (c/d) button. 4 Playback and Pause Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. 5 Shuffle All 112 En All of the songs in the disc can be played at random by touching only one key. p If the disc contains a mixture of various media file types, all tracks within the current part (CD or ROM) are played randomly. p To cancel random play, switch [Ran-
dom] to [Off] on the Function menu. Selecting a track from the list The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder names on a disc. Touch a folder on the list to view its contents. You can play a track on the list by touching it. Touch [List]. 1 Contents of the folder in which the currently playing file is located are displayed. 2 Touch the folder that you want to view. or switches the selection to the The track currently playing is highlighted. Touching next or previous page in the list. Touching folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder is listed, displays the content of the upper cannot be used. 3 Touch the track you want to play. p To cancel the list screen, touch [Detail]. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [DISC] on the AV Source menu to display the ROM screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Playing music files on ROM 2 Touch
. 1 2 3 4 1 Repeating play Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting as follows:
! Disc Repeats all compressed audio files
! Track Repeats just the current track
! Folder Repeats the current folder p If you select another folder during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to
[Disc]. p If you perform fast forward/rewind dur-
ing [Track], the repeat play range changes to [Folder]. p When [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-
sible to play back a subfolder of that folder. p When playing discs with compressed audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-
peat play is performed within the cur-
rently playing data session even if [Disc]
is selected. 2 Play tracks in a random order Touching [Random] switches between [On]
and [Off]. When using ROM, the tracks in the current repeat play range are randomly played. p If you turn [Random] to [On] when the repeat play range is set to [Track], the re-
peat play range changes to [Folder]
automatically. 3 Scan folders and tracks Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track. Scan play is performed in the current repeat play range. Chapter 18 P l a y i n g m u s i c f i l e s o n R O M Touching [Scan] switches between [On]
and [Off]. When you find the track you want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off. p After completion of track or folder scan-
ning, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. p If you turn [Scan] to [On] when the re-
peat play range is set to [Track], the re-
peat play range changes to [Folder]
automatically. p If you turn [Scan] to [On] while the re-
peat play range is set to [Disc], scan play is performed for only the first tracks of each folder. 4 Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automa-
tically enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound. Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes the setting as follows:
! Mode 1 Activates advanced sound retriever function.
! Mode 2 Activates advanced sound retriever function.
! Off Deactivates advanced sound re-
triever function. p MODE 2 is more effective than MODE 1. En 113 Chapter 19 Playing a DVD-Video You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in drive of the navigation system. This section de-
scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video. Using the touch panel keys Playback screen (page1) 1 Reading the screen 1 2 43 65 87 9 ab 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Title number indicator Shows the title number currently playing. 3 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 4 Digital sound format indicator Shows which digital sound format (surround sound format) has been selected. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current title. 6 Current time 7 Audio track indicator Shows the audio track number and audio lan-
guage currently selected. 8 Audio channel indicator Shows the current audio channel type, such as Mch (Multi-channel). 9 Subtitle number indicator Shows the subtitle number currently selected. a Subtitle language indicator Shows the subtitle language currently se-
lected. b Viewing angle indicator Shows what viewing angle has been selected. 114 En Playback screen (page2) 87 9 1 Playback screen (page3) 8d e 1 2 3 4 5 6 a b c 5 6 f g h 5 6 8 p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not valid. 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on page 117. 2 Display the DVD menu Chapter 19 P l a y i n g a D V D V d e o i
Playing a DVD-Video You can display the menu by touching [Menu]
or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touch-
ing either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-
vided with the disc. 3 Skip forward or backward Touching [p] skips to the start of the next chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the start of the current chapter. Touching it again will skip to the previous chapter. p You can also perform these operations by using the TRK (c/d) button. 4 Playback and Pause Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. 5 Switch the display Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the information plate as follows:
Disc information display Repeat range and L/R select display 6 Hide the touch panel keys Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again. 7 Display the DVD menu keypad
= For details, refer to Using DVD menu by touch panel keys on the next page. 8 Switch next page of touch panel keys 9 Stop playback a Skip the title forward or backward Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title. Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous title. b Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion playback)
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-
back on page 117.
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback on page 117. c Fast reverse or forward Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or forward. If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed for five seconds. d Searching for a desired scene and starting playback from a specified time p For details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a specified time on the next page. e Perform an operation (such as resuming) that is stored on the disc When using a DVD that has a point recorded that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-
turns to the specified point and begins play-
back from that point. f Change the viewing angle (Multi-angle) Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-
ing angles. p During playback of a scene shot from multiple angles, the angle icon is displayed. Turn the angle icon display on or off using the DVD/DivX Setup menu.
= For details, refer to Setting the angle icon display on page 126. g Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle) Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the subtitle languages. h Change audio language and audio sys-
tems (Multi-audio) Each touch of [Audio] switches between audio languages and audio systems. p DTS audio cannot be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. p Display indications such as MPEG-A and Mch indicate the audio system re-
corded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not use the same audio system as that indicated. Resuming playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume play-
back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. En 115 Chapter 19 Playing a DVD-Video
% Touching [BookM.]:
You can bookmark one point for each of up to five discs. If you try to memorize another point for the same disc, the oldest bookmark will be overwritten by the newest one. p To clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and hold [BookM.]. Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time You can search for the scene you want by spe-
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time. p Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time). Touch the keys to input the target num-
2 ber or time and then touch [Enter]. For titles, chapters
! To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in Direct number search You can use this function when you need to enter a numerical command during DVD play-
back. 1 Touch [10Key]. Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired 2 number. 3 While the input number is displayed, touch [Enter]. Operating the DVD menu You can operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item on the screen directly. p This function can be used when the key is displayed on the lower right corner of the LCD screen. p This function may not work properly with some DVD disc content. In that case, use touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. p New translation required. Touch the screen to display the touch 1 panel keys. Touch [Top Menu] or [Menu] to display 2 touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. Touch the desired menu item. 3
# Touch New translation required. Using DVD menu by touch panel keys If items on the DVD menu appear, the touch panel keys may overlay them. If so, select an item using those touch panel keys. order. For time (time search)
! To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order. p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear]. To cancel the input numbers, touch and hold [Clear]. 116 En Playing a DVD-Video Touch [a], [b], [c] or [d] to select the 1 desired menu item. p If the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-
tion disappear, touching anywhere on the screen, then touching displays them again. Touch [Enter]. 2 Playback starts from the selected menu item. The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc.
# Touch [Position]. Each touch of [Position] changes the display po-
sition of touch panel keys.
# Touch [Hide]. New translation required. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback.
% Touch [r] during playback. Each time you touch [r], you move ahead one frame. To return to normal playback, touch [f]. p With some discs, images may be unclear during frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. Touch and hold [r] until 1 played during playback. The icon motion playback begins. is displayed, and forward slow is dis-
p To return to normal playback, touch [f]. Chapter 19 P l a y i n g a D V D V d e o i
Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback 2 speed during slow motion playback. Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes the speed in four steps in the following order:
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2 p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back. p With some discs, images may be unclear during slow motion playback. p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [DISC] on the AV Source menu to display the DVD-V screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Touch the screen to display the touch 2 panel keys. 3 Touch
. 1 2 3 1 Repeating play Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting as follows:
! Disc Plays throughout the current disc
! Title Repeats just the current title
! Chapter Repeats just the current chapter p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast forward/rewind or slow motion playback, the repeat play range changes to [Disc]. p This function is not available when disc playback has been stopped. En 117 Chapter 19 Playing a DVD-Video 2 Selecting audio output When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-
sired audio output appears in the display. Each touch of [L/R Select] changes the set-
tings as follows:
! L+R Left and right
! L Left
! R Right
! Mix Mixing left and right p This function is not available when disc playback has been stopped. 3 DVD setup adjustments
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/
DivX Setup menu on page 126. 118 En Chapter 20 P l a y i n g a D V D V R d
i s c Playing a DVD-VR disc You can play a DVD-VR (DVD Video Recording Format) disc using the built-in drive of the na-
vigation system. This section describes opera-
tions for DVD-VR discs. Using the touch panel keys Playback screen (page1) 1 Reading the screen 1 2 43 65 87 9 a 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Title number indicator Shows the title number currently playing. 3 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 4 Digital sound format indicator Shows which digital sound format (surround sound format) has been selected. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current title. 6 Current time 7 Audio track indicator Shows the audio track number currently se-
lected. 8 Audio channel indicator Shows the current audio channel type, such as Mch (Multi-channel). 9 Play mode indicator Shows the current play mode.
= For details, refer to Switch the play-
back mode on page 121. a Mixing condition indicator Shows the current mixing condition. Playback screen (page2) 8 9 a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 b c d e 6 7 f g 9 p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not valid. 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on page 122. 2 c CM Back/CM Skip d
= For details, refer to Using the short-
time skip function on page 121. 3 Switch the playback mode
= For details, refer to Switch the play-
back mode on page 121. 4 Skip forward or backward Touching [p] skips to the start of the next chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the start of the current chapter. Touching it again will skip to the previous chapter. p You can also perform these operations by using the TRK (c/d) button. 5 Playback and Pause En 119 Chapter 20 Playing a DVD-VR disc Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. 6 Switch the display Touching [Disp] changes the information as follows:
Disc information display Repeat range dis-
play 7 Hide the touch panel keys Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again. 8 Display the title list Displays the title list recorded on the disc. 9 Switch next page of touch panel keys a Stop playback b Change audio tracks (Multi-audio) Each touch of [Audio] switches between audio tracks. p Display indications such as MPEG-A and Mch indicate the audio system re-
corded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not use the same audio system as that indicated. c Skip the title forward or backward Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title. Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous title. d Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle) Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the subtitle languages. e Fast reverse or forward Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or forward. If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed for five seconds. f Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion playback)
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-
back on the next page.
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback on the next page. g Searching for a desired scene and starting playback from a specified time 120 En
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a specified time on this page. Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time You can search for the scene you want by spe-
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time. p Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time). Touch the keys to input the target num-
2 ber or time and then touch [Enter]. For titles, chapters
! To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in order. For time (time search)
! To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order. p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear]. To cancel the input numbers, touch and hold [Clear].
1 | User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 2.03 MiB | November 06 2009 |
Playing a DVD-VR disc Switch the playback mode You have two methods for playing DVD-VR discs; Original (original) and Playlist (play-
list). p Titles created with DVD recorders are called original. Those based on original, re-
arranged titles are called playlist. Playlists are created on DVD-R/-RW discs.
% Touch [Mode Change] to switch the play mode. If the play mode is changed, playback starts from the beginning of the selected play mode. Using the short-time skip function This function enables you to skip over your specified interval on the video playback. This is useful to skip commercials on your recorded DVD-VR disc.
% To skip progressively backward or for-
ward, touch [c CM Back] or [CM Skip d]. Each touch of [c CM Back] or [CM Skip d]
changes steps in the following order:
c CM Back 5 sec. 15 sec. 30 sec. 1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 0 sec. CM Skip d 30 sec. 1 min. 1.5 min. 2 min. 3 min. 5 min. 10 min. 0 sec. Playing by selecting from the title list You can select and play the title you want from the list. 1 Touch [List] on the playback screen. Chapter 20 2 Touch the title to play from the list. p Touching or switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list. To return to the previous screen, touch 3
[List]. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback.
% Touch [r] during playback. Each time you touch [r], you move ahead one frame. To return to normal playback, touch [f]. p With some discs, images may be unclear during frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. P l a y i n g a D V D V R d
i s c Touch and hold [r] until 1 played during playback. The icon motion playback begins. is displayed, and forward slow is dis-
p To return to normal playback, touch [f]. Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback 2 speed during slow motion playback. Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes the speed in four steps in the following order:
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2 p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back. p With some discs, images may be unclear during slow motion playback. p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble. En 121 Chapter 20 Playing a DVD-VR disc Using the Function menu 1 Touch [DISC] on the AV Source menu to display the DVD-VR screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Touch the screen to display the touch 2 panel keys. 3 Touch Function menu
. 1 2 3 1 Repeating play Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting as follows:
! Title Repeats just the current title
! Chapter Repeats just the current chapter
! Disc Plays throughout the current disc p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast forward/rewind or slow motion playback, the repeat play range changes to [Disc]. 2 Selecting audio output When playing DVDs that both channels are recorded in monaural, you can switch the audio output. Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display.
! L+R Left and right
! L Left
! R Right
! Mix Mixing left and right p This function is not available when disc playback has been stopped. 3 DVD setup adjustments
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/
DivX Setup menu on page 126. 122 En Chapter 21 P l a y i n g a D i v X v i d e o Playing a DivX video You can play a DivX disc using the built-in drive of the navigation system. This section de-
scribes that operations. Using the touch panel keys Playback screen (page1) 1 Reading the screen 1 2 43 65 87 9 a 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 3 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 4 Digital sound format indicator Shows the digital sound format (surround sound format) currently selected. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file. 6 Current time 7 Audio track indicator Shows the audio track number currently se-
lected. 8 Audio channel indicator Shows the current audio channel type, such as Mch (Multi-channel). 9 Subtitle number indicator Shows the subtitle number currently selected. a Repeat range indicator Shows which repeat range has been selected. Playback screen (page2) 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 a b c d 4 5 e 7 p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not valid. 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on page 125. 2 Switch the media file type played When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types, you can switch be-
tween media files types to play. Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between the following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) ROM (com-
pressed audio file) DivX (DivX video files) p This touch panel key appears only when playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types. 3 Skip forward or backward En 123 Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback.
% Touch [r] during playback. Each time you touch [r], you move ahead one frame. To return to normal playback, touch [f]. p With some discs, images may be unclear during frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed.
% Touch and hold [r] until played during playback. The icon motion playback begins. is displayed, and forward slow is dis-
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]
or [m], etc. p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back. p With some discs, images may be unclear during slow motion playback. p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble. Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time You can search for a desired scene by specify-
ing the time. p Time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 Touch [Search]. Chapter 21 Playing a DivX video Touching [p] skips to the start of the next file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of the current file. Touching again will skip to the previous file. p You can also perform these operations by using TRK (c/d) button. 4 Playback and Pause Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. 5 Switch the information Touching [Disp] changes the content of the in-
formation panel as follows:
Disc information display Current folder dis-
play File name display 6 Hide the touch panel keys Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again. 7 Display the title list Displays the title list recorded on the disc. 8 Switch next page of touch panel keys 9 Stop playback a Change audio tracks (Multi-audio) Each touch of [Audio] switches between audio tracks. b Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle) Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the subtitle languages. c Fast reverse or forward Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or forward. If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed for five seconds. d Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion playback)
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-
back on this page.
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback on this page. e Searching for a desired scene and starting playback from a specified time
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a specified time on this page. 124 En Playing a DivX video Chapter 21 Touch the keys to input the target num-
2 ber or time and then touch [Enter]. For time (time search)
! To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order. p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear]. To cancel the input numbers, touch and hold [Clear]. Playing by selecting from the title list You can select and play the title you want from the list. 1 2 Touch [List] on the playback screen. Touch the title to play from the list. p Touching or switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list. To return to the previous screen, touch 3
[List]. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [DISC] on the AV Source menu to display the DivX screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Touch the screen to display the touch 2 panel keys. 3 Touch Function menu
. 1 2 1 Repeating play Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting as follows:
! File Repeat just the current file
! Folder Repeat just the current folder
! Disc Plays throughout the current disc p If you select another folder during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to
[Disc]. p If you perform fast forward/rewind dur-
ing [File], the repeat play range changes to [Folder]. p When [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-
sible to play back a subfolder of that folder. p When playing discs with compressed audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-
peat play is performed within DivX vi-
deos even if [Disc] is selected. 2 DVD setup adjustments
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/
DivX Setup menu on the next page. P l a y i n g a D i v X v i d e o En 125 Chapter 22 DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup Configure the DVD-Video/DVD-VR/DivX player. Displaying DVD/DivX Setup menu 1 DVD-VR or DivX. Play the disc that contains DVD-Video, Touch [DISC] on the AV Source menu 2 to display the normal playback screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Touch 3 The Function menu appears. Touch [DVD/DivX Setup]. 4 The DVD/DivX Setup screen appears. 5 Touch the desired function. Setting the top-priority languages You can assign the top-priority language to the top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial playback. If the selected language is recorded on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-
played or output in that language. 1 Display the DVD/DivX Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX Setup menu on this page. Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-
2 guage] or [Menu Language]. Each language menu is displayed and the cur-
rently set language is selected. 126 En Touch the desired language. 3 When you select [Others], a language code input display is shown. Input the four digit code of the desired language then touch
[Enter].
= Refer to Language code chart for DVDs on page 129. p If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the default language specified on the disc is output and displayed. p You can also switch the subtitle and audio language by touching [S.Title] or [Audio]
during playback. p Even if you use [S.Title] or [Audio] to switch the subtitle or audio language, this does not affect the settings here. Setting the angle icon display You can set the angle icon to display in scenes where the angle can be switched. 1 Display the DVD/DivX Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX Setup menu on this page. Touch [Multi Angle]. 2 Touching [Multi Angle] switches between
[On] and [Off]. Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio suitable for your rear display. (We recommend use of this function only when you want to fit it to the rear display.) p When using a regular display, select either Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may result in an unnatural picture. 1 Display the DVD/DivX Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX Setup menu on this page. DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup Chapter 22 Touch [TV Aspect]. 2 Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the setting as follows:
! 16:9 Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-
4 While the input number is displayed, touch [Enter]. The code number is registered, and you can now set the level. played as it is (initial setting)
! Letter Box The picture is in the shape of a letter box with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen
! Panscan The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen p When playing discs that do not have a pan-
scan system, the disc is played back with
[Letter Box] even if you select [Panscan]
setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the mark. p Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the discs in-
structions. Setting the parental lock Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental lock to set restrictions so that children cannot watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You can set the parental lock level in steps as de-
sired. p When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis-
played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level When you first use this function, register your code number. If you do not register a code number, parental lock will not operate. 1 Display the DVD/DivX Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX Setup menu on the previous page. 2 Touch [Parental Level]. Touch [0] to [9] to input a four digit 3 code number. Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-
5 sired level. The parental lock level is set.
! Level 8 Playback of the entire disc is possible (initial setting)
! Level 7 to Level 2 Playback of discs for children and non-adult oriented discs is possible
! Level 1 Only playback of discs for chil-
dren is possible p If you want to change the parental level al-
ready set, enter the registered code number and then select the parental level. p We recommend that you keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. p The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. You can confirm it by looking at the disc package, the included literature or the disc itself. You cannot use parental lock with discs that do not feature a recorded parental lock level. p With some discs, parental lock operates to skip certain scenes only, after which normal playback resumes. For details, refer to the discs instructions. p If you forget the registered code number, touch [Clear] 10 times on the number input screen. The registered code number is can-
celed, letting you register a new one. Setting Auto Play When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-
cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. p This function is available for DVD-Video. p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If this function is not fully operable, turn this function off and start playback.
D V D V d e o i
, D V D V R
, D i v X s e t u p En 127 Chapter 22 DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup 1 Display the DVD/DivX Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX Setup menu on page 126. Touch [Auto Play]. 2 Touching [Auto Play] switches this setting be-
tween [On] and [Off]. p New translation required. Setting the subtitle file for DivX You can select whether to display DivX exter-
nal subtitles or not. p If no DivX external subtitle files exist, the original DivX subtitles are displayed even when [Custom] is selected. 1 Display the DVD/DivX Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX Setup menu on page 126. Touch [Subtitle File]. 2 Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting between [Original] and [Custom]. p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line. If more than 42 characters are set, the line breaks and the characters are dis-
played on the next line. p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen. If more than 126 characters are set, the excess characters will not be dis-
played. p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-
responding subtitle files exist. p Up to three lines can be displayed at once. 128 En DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup Language code chart for DVDs Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 Spanish (es), 0519 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Belorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Language (code), input code Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laotian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Language (code), input code Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Rumanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sango (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Shinghalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tongan (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapk (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Chapter 22
D V D V d e o i
, D V D V R
, D i v X s e t u p En 129 Chapter 23 Playing music files (from USB or SD) You can play the compressed audio files stored in the external storage device (USB, SD). p In the following description, the SD mem-
ory card and USB memory device are col-
lectively referred to as the external storage device (USB, SD). If it indicates the USB memory device only, it is referred to as the USB storage device. Starting procedure 1 card slot or plug the USB storage device into the USB connector. Insert the SD memory card into the SD
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-
rage device on page 30.
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source 2 menu to display the USB or SD screen. p Playback is performed in order of folder number. Folders are skipped if they con-
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-
able files in folder 001 (root folder), playback starts from folder 002.) Reading the screen 1 2 3 4 65 7 8 9 a b c p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some external storage devices. p You can playback the files on a USB sto-
rage device compliant with Mass Storage Class. For details about the USB Class, 130 En refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-
rage device. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Folder number indicator 3 Current folder name indicator Shows the folder name currently playing. 4 File number indicator 5 Playback condition indicator The marks shown below appears and indi-
cates the current playback condition.
: Scan play
: Random play
: Repeat play Indicator Meaning Media Repeat Folder Repeat Track Repeat Media Random Folder Random Media Scan Folder Scan All audio files in the current external storage device
(USB, SD) are played repeat-
edly. This is the default con-
dition. The current folder is played repeatedly. The current file is played re-
peatedly. All audio files in the current external storage device
(USB, SD) are played in ran-
dom order. All audio files in the current folder are played in random order. The beginning of each audio file is played for about 10 seconds. The beginning of each track in the current folder is played for about 10 seconds.
= For more information, refer to Using the Function menu on page 132. 6 File type indicator Shows the type of audio file currently playing. 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current track. 8 Current time Playing music files (from USB or SD) Chapter 23 9 Current file number and total number of files Shows the file number currently played and the total number of playable audio files. a Track title indicator*
Shows the title of the track currently playing
(when available).
! New translation required. b Artist name indicator*
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available). c Album title indicator*
Shows the title of the album for the current track (when available). p The information marked with an asterisk (*) is displayed only when the information has been encoded on the compressed audio files. If specific information has not been encoded on the files, is displayed in-
stead. Using the touch panel keys
(Music) 1 2 3 4 5 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on the next page. 2 Switch the operation screen Touching this key switches between the screen to operate music files and the screen to operate video files. This touch panel key is available only when there are both audio and video files in the external storage device (USB, SD). 3 Skip forward or backward Touching [p] skips to the start of the next file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of the current file. Touching again will skip to the previous file. Fast reverse or forward Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind or fast forward. p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-
ward. p You can also perform these operations by using the TRK (c/d) button. 4 Playback and Pause Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. Selecting a track from the list The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder names on an external storage device
(USB, SD). Touch a folder on the list to view its contents. Touch a track on the list to play that track. Touch [List]. 1 Contents of the folder in which the currently playing file is located are displayed.
# Touch and hold [List]. New translation required. 2 Touch the folder that you want to view. P l a y i n g m u s i c f i l e s
f r o m U S B o r S D
) or switches the selection to the The track currently playing is highlighted. Touching next or previous page in the list. Touching folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder is listed, displays the content of the upper cannot be used. En 131 Chapter 23 Playing music files (from USB or SD) 3 Touch the track you want to play. p To cancel the list screen, touch [Detail]. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source menu to display the USB or SD screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 2 Touch
. 1 2 3 Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track. Scan play is performed in the current repeat play range. Touching [Scan] switches between On and Off. When you find the track you want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off. p After all tracks or folders scanning are finished, normal playback will begin again. p If you turn [Scan] to On while the re-
peat play range is set to Track, the re-
peat play range changes to Folder automatically. 1 Repeating play Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting as follows:
! Media Repeat all compressed audio files in the selected external storage de-
vice (USB, SD)
! Track Repeat just the current track
! Folder Repeat the current folder p If you skip the file forward or backward when the repeat play range in Track, the repeat play range changes to Folder. 2 Play tracks in a random order Random play lets you playback tracks in random order within the current repeat range. Touching [Random] switches between On and Off. p If you turn [Random] to On while the repeat play range is set to Track, the repeat play range changes to Folder automatically. 3 Scan folders and tracks 132 En Playing video files (from USB or SD) Chapter 24 You can play the video files stored in the exter-
nal storage device (USB, SD). p In the following description, the SD mem-
ory card and USB memory device are col-
lectively referred to as the external storage device (USB, SD). If it indicates the USB memory device only, it is referred to as the USB storage device. Starting procedure 1 card slot or plug the USB storage device into the USB connector. Insert the SD memory card into the SD
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-
rage device on page 30.
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 29. Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source 2 menu to display each operation screen. p Playback is performed in order of folder number. Folders are skipped if they con-
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-
able files in folder 001 (root folder), playback starts from folder 002.) Reading the screen 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some external storage devices. p You can playback the files on a USB sto-
rage device compliant with Mass Storage Class. For details about the USB Class, refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-
rage device. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Folder number indicator 3 File number indicator 4 File type indicator Shows the type of audio file currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current track. 6 Current folder name indicator Shows the folder name currently playing. Using the touch panel keys
(Video) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on page 135. 2 Switch the operation screen Touching this key switches between the screen to operate music files and the screen to operate video files. This touch panel key is available only when there are both audio and video files in the external storage device (USB, SD). 3 Searching for a desired scene and starting playback from a specified time
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a specified time on the next page. 4 Skip forward or backward P l a y i n g v i d e o f i l e s
f r o m U S B o r S D
) En 133 Chapter 24 Playing video files (from USB or SD) To return to the previous screen, touch 3
[Detail]. Searching for a specific scene and starting playback from a specified time You can search for a desired scene by specify-
ing the time. 1 Touch [Search]. Touch the keys to input the target num-
2 ber or time and then touch [Enter].
! To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order. p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear]. To cancel the input numbers, touch and hold [Clear]. Touching [p] skips to the start of the next file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of the current file. Touching again will skip to the previous file. Fast reverse or forward Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind or fast forward. p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-
ward. p You can also perform these operations by using the TRK (c/d) button. 5 Playback and Pause Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. 6 Hide the touch panel keys Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again. 7 Stop playback 8 Display the title list Displays the title list recorded on the external storage device (USB, SD). Playing by selecting from the title list You can select and play the title you want from the list. Touch [List] on the playback screen. 1 Contents of the folder in which the currently playing file is located are displayed.
# Touch and hold [List]. New translation required. 2 Touch the title to play from the list. p Touching or switches the selection to the next or previous page in the list. 134 En Playing video files (from USB or SD) Chapter 24 Using the Function menu 1 Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source menu to display the USB or SD screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Touch the screen to display the touch 2 panel keys. 3 Touch
. p If the touch panel keys are not shown, touch anywhere on the screen to display them. 1 2 1 Repeating play Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting as follows:
! Media Repeat all video files in the se-
lected external storage device (USB, SD)
! File Repeat just the current file
! Folder Repeat the current folder p If you skip the file forward or backward when the repeat play range in Track, the repeat play range changes to Folder. 2 Changing the screen size of video If a video file is played, you can select the display mode between normal and full screen. Each touch of [Video Output Setting]
changes the setting as follows:
! Normal Video files appear in normal size.
! Full Video files appear in a full-
screen P l a y i n g v i d e o f i l e s
f r o m U S B o r S D
) En 135 Chapter 25 Using an iPod (iPod) Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-
tion system. p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)
(sold separately) is required for connection. Video 1 6 Starting procedure
% Connect your iPod. The source changes and then playback will start.
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on page 31. p If the iPod is already connected, touch
[iPod] on the AV Source menu.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. p No video output if iPod is selected as AV source, check the setting in AV1 Input on the AV System Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1
(AV1) on page 159. Reading the screen Music 1 2 43 5 6 7 8 9 a 136 En d 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Song number indicator Shows the number of the song currently play-
ing and total number of songs in the selected list. 3 Shuffle play indicator Appears when shuffle play is activated. 4 Repeat play indicator Appears when repeat play is activated.
: All-tracks repeat
: One-track repeat 5 Current time 6 Album artwork Album art of the current song is displayed if it is available. 7 Song title (episode) indicator Shows the title of the current song. When a podcast is played, the episode is displayed. 8 Artist name (podcast title) indicator Shows the artist name currently playing. When a podcast is played, the podcast title is displayed. 9 Album title (release date) indicator Shows the title of the album for the song. When a podcast is played, the release date is displayed. a Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current song. b Chapter number indicator Shows the current chapter number and total number of chapters when the video with chap-
ters played. Using an iPod (iPod) p If characters recorded on the iPod are not compatible with this navigation system, they may turn into garbled characters. Using the touch panel keys
(Music) 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 8 1 Album artwork Touch the key to enlarge the album artwork. If you touch again, the artwork returns to its nor-
mal size. 2 Category tabs Shows the list to narrow down the songs. If you want to use the list of Audiobooks, Composers or Songs, touch [Menu] to display the lists. 3 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on page 140. 4 Switch the operation screen Touching this key switches between the screen to operate music files and the screen to operate video files. After you touch the key, the top category menu appears to let you se-
lect the item for playback. p This touch panel key is available only when there are both audio and video file in your iPod. 5 Display the top category menu Touching the key displays the top category be-
fore you use the category tabs. If you select the song using the category tabs to play, touching the key displays the previous list. 6 Skip back or forward to another song Chapter 25 U s i n g a n i P o d
i P o d
) Touching [p] skips to the start of the next song. Touching [o] once skips to the start of the current song. Touching again will skip to the previous song. When the track with chapters played, chapter can be skipped back and forward. Fast reverse or forward Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind or fast forward. p You can also perform these operations by using the TRK (c/d) button. 7 Playback and Pause Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. 8 Shuffle All All songs (except for the track in Audio-
books and Podcasts) in your iPod can be played randomly. p To cancel the random play, switch
[Shuffle] on the Function menu to the Off. Browsing for a song Touch an item on list to search for a song and play it on your iPod. Narrowing down listed songs 1 play the song or track list. Touch your desired category tab to dis-
! Playlists (playlists)
! Genres (genres)
! Artists (artists)
! Albums (albums)
! Podcasts (podcasts) The search screen is displayed. En 137 Chapter 25 Using an iPod (iPod) Touching or 2 to the next or previous page in the list. switches the selection 3 Touch the item that you want to refine. Refine the item until the track title is displayed on the list. p Touching [All] on the list includes all op-
tions in the current list. For example, if you touch [All] after touching [Artists], you can proceed to the next screen with all artists in the list selected. p After you select Artists, Albums, or Genres, go on to touch one of the list to start playing the first songs in the selected list and display the next options. 4 On the song (or episode) list, touch the track you want to play. p After you select the track using this func-
tion, touching [Menu] displays the list pre-
viously selected. Searching for applicable items alphabetically Using the search control displays the page which includes the first applicable option. p This function is available for the alphabeti-
cal list only. and the next character will be taken into ac-
count for searching. A or a AN, An, or an THE, The, or the Touch the character key to display the 4 page which includes applicable options. 5 On the song (or episode) list, touch the track you want to play. Operating this navigation system's iPod function from your iPod This navigation systems iPod function can be operated from your iPod. Sound can be heard from the cars speakers, and operation can be conducted from your iPod. This function can be operated with the follow-
ing iPod models:
Even if [Change Control Mode] is set to
[iPod], following functions are available from this navigation system.
! Playback and Pause
! Fast reverse or forward
! Skip forward or backward
! Adjusting the volume Starting the video playback This navigation system can play video if an iPod with video capabilities is connected. Search control 1 Touch [Video]. Touch your desired category tab to dis-
1 play the list. 2 3 Touch the item that you want to refine. Touch [c] or [d] to select the character. p An article listed below and space at the be-
ginning of the artist name will be ignored 138 En Using an iPod (iPod) Touch one of the categories in that con-
2 tains the video you want to play. Video playback will start. 3 Touch your desired item on the list to narrow down them until the video list ap-
pears.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Browsing for a video on this page. 4 On the video list, touch the video you want to play. Touch the screen to display the touch 5 panel keys.
= For more details of the operation, refer to Using the touch panel keys (Video) on this page. Using the touch panel keys
(Video) 1 3 3 4 5 6 7 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on the next page. 2 Switch the operation screen Chapter 25 U s i n g a n i P o d
i P o d
) Touching this key switches between the screen to operate music files and the screen to operate video files. After you touch the key, the top category menu appears to let you se-
lect the item for playback. p This touch panel key is available only when there are both audio and video file in your iPod. 3 Display the previous selected list If you select the video from the list to play after touching Top Menu, touching the key displays the previous list. 4 Skip back or forward to another song Touching [p] skips to the start of the next video. Touching [o] once skips to the start of the current video. Touching again will skip to the previous video. When the video with chapters played, chapter can be skipped back and forward. Fast reverse or forward Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind or fast forward. If you touch and hold [o] or [p] for five seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [o] or [p]. p You can also perform these operations by using the TRK (c/d) button. 5 Playback and Pause Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. 6 Display the top category menu for video Touching the key displays the top category for video playback. 7 Hide the touch panel keys Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again. Browsing for a video Touching the item on list allows you to search for a video and play it in your iPod. En 139
1 | User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 2.67 MiB | November 06 2009 |
Chapter 25 Using an iPod (iPod) Narrowing down a video with the list 1 Touch the category you want. Touching or 2 to the next or previous page in the list. switches the selection 3 Touch the item that you want to refine. Refine the item until the track title is displayed on the list. 4 On the video list, touch the video you want to play. p After you select the video using this func-
tion, touching [Menu] displays the list pre-
viously selected. Searching for applicable items alphabetically Using the search control displays the page which includes the first applicable option. p This function is available for the alphabeti-
cal list only. Search control 1 2 3 Touch the category you want. Touch the item that you want to refine. Touch [c] or [d] to select the character. p An article listed below and space at the be-
ginning of the artist name will be ignored 140 En and the next character will be taken into ac-
count for searching. A or a AN, An, or an THE, The, or the Touch the character key to display the 4 page which includes applicable options. 5 On the video list, touch the video you want to play. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [iPod] on the AV Source menu to display the control screen for iPod.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 2 Touch
. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Setting repeat play There are two repeat play types for play-
back. Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting as follows:
! One Repeats just the current track
! All Repeats all tracks in the selected list 2 Setting the shuffle play for music This function shuffles songs or albums and plays them in random order. Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the setting as follows:
! Off Does not shuffle.
! Shuffle Songs Plays back songs in random order within the selected list Using an iPod (iPod)
! Shuffle Albums Selects an album randomly, and then plays back all songs in that album in order 3 Setting the audiobook play speed While listening to an audiobook on iPod, playback speed can be changed. Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the setting as follows:
! Normal Playback in normal speed
! Slower Playback slower than normal speed
! Faster Playback faster than normal speed 4 Playback video in wide screen mode If the video is compatible with wide screen format, set [Widescreen] to [On] in order to view the video image in the wide screen. Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the setting as follows:
! On Outputs the wide-screen video from iPod
! Off Outputs the normal-sized video from iPod p Display size is changed after you change Widescreen setting and select the video to play. p This setting is available only during the video operation. 5 Setting iPod control mode While the control mode is set to iPod, you can operate iPod function from the con-
nected iPod. Each touch of [Change Control Mode]
changes the setting as follows:
! Navi This navigation systems iPod function can be operated from this navi-
gation system.
! iPod This navigation systems iPod function can be operated from the con-
nected iPod. 6 Playing songs related to the currently play-
ing song Songs related to the currently playing song are played. You can play songs of the follow-
ing lists.
! Artist list of currently playing genre
! Album list of currently playing artist
! Song list of currently playing album p Depending on the number of files in the iPod, there may be a delay when display-
ing a list.
! Link Artist Songs related to the cur-
rently playing artist will be played.
! Link Album Songs related to the cur-
rently playing album will be played.
! Link Genre Songs related to the cur-
rently playing genre will be played. Chapter 25 U s i n g a n i P o d
i P o d
) En 141 Chapter 26 Using the Bluetooth audio player You can control the Bluetooth audio player featuring Bluetooth wireless technology. p Before using the Bluetooth audio player, you need to register and connect the device to this navigation system.
= For more details of the operation, refer to Registering and connecting the Blue-
tooth device on page 76. p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player connected to this navigation system, the available operations with this navigation system are limited to the following two le-
vels:
A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribu-
tion Profile): Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible. AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile): Playing back, pausing, selecting songs, etc., are possible. p Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market, op-
erations with your Bluetooth audio player using this navigation system vary greatly in range. Please refer to the instruction man-
ual that came with your Bluetooth audio player as well as this manual while operat-
ing your player on this navigation system. p While you are listening to songs on your Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from operating your cellular phone as much as possible. If you try operating on your cellu-
lar phone, the signal from your cellular phone may cause a noise on the song play-
back. p Even if you switch to another source while listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio player, the playback of song continues to elapse. p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player you connected to this navigation system, operations on this navigation system to control the player may differ from those ex-
plained in this manual.
% Touch [Bluetooth Audio] on the AV Source menu to display the Bluetooth Audio screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Reading the screen 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Track number indicator 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current track. 4 Device name 5 Bluetooth connection status indicator 6 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 7 Track title indicator*
Shows the title of the track currently playing
(when available). 8 Artist name indicator*
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available). 9 Album title indicator*
Shows the title of the album for the current track (when available). a Playback condition indicator The marks shown below appears and indi-
cates the current playback condition.
: Random play
: Repeat play Indicator Meaning Media Repeat ALL REPEAT RAMDOM All audio files in the current Bluetooth audio player are played repeatedly. This is the default condition. 142 En Chapter 26 U s i n g t h e B l u e t o o t h a u d i o p l a y e r Using the Bluetooth audio player 2 Touch
. 1 2 1 Repeating play Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting as follows:
! All Repeat Repeats all compressed audio files in the Bluetooth audio player
! Track Repeat Repeats just the cur-
rent track
! Off Does not repeat. p If you skip the file forward or backward when the repeat play range in Track Re-
peat, the repeat play range changes to All Repeat. 2 Play tracks in a random order Random play lets you playback tracks in random order within the current repeat range. Touching [Random] switches between On and Off. Track Repeat Track Repeat Random Media Random The current file is played re-
peatedly. All audio files in the current Bluetooth audio player are played in random order.
= For more information, refer to Using the Function menu on page 132. Using the touch panel keys 1 2 3 1 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on page 132. 2 Connect the Bluetooth audio player Touching [Connection] connects the Blue-
tooth audio player manually. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [Bluetooth Audio] on the AV Source menu to display the Bluetooth Audio screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. En 143 Chapter 27 Using the XM tuner You can use the navigation system to control an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-
parately. For details concerning operation, refer to the XM tuners operation manuals. This section provides information on XM operations with the navigation system which differs from that described in the XM tuners operation man-
ual. The following XM satellite digital tuner units cannot be connected:
GEX-P900XM, GEX-P910XM Reading the screen ALL CH MODE CATEGORY MODE About the logo for channel name Only the logo data that is contained in the na-
vigation system can be displayed for each channel. The logo of a newly established chan-
nel that is not contained cannot be displayed. When no logo may be displayed, the following substitute icon is displayed. Substitute icon 144 En p The icon of each broadcast station is con-
tained in the hard disk drive based on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio as of December 2008. p Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-
tion in the future may not be supported by the navigation system, and may cause the unit to display incorrect icons. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 XM band indicator Shows the XM band that has been selected. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset item has been selected. 4 XM channel number indicator Shows the XM channel number the tuner is currently tuned to. 5 Current time 6 XM channel category Shows the category of broadcast channel. 7 XM channel select mode indicator Shows what channel select mode has been selected. You can select a channel from all channels in ALL CH MODE, and select a channel from selected category in CATEGORY MODE. 8 XM station name logo p The message ON THE AIR disappears if the navigation system cannot receive XM tuner reception for some reason. 9 XM station name indicator Shows the XM broadcast station name the tuner is currently tuned in. a Detail information Shows the detailed information of the broad-
cast channel currently being received. Using the touch panel keys
% Touch [XM] on the AV Source menu to display the XM screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Using the XM tuner ALL CH MODE CATEGORY MODE 1 Memorize the current song
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song on the next page. 2 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on page 147. 3 Recalling channels from the preset Touch to recall the preset channel. 4 Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one at a time. p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can skip the broadcasting channels. 5 Select an XM band Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired XM band is displayed: XM 1, XM 2 or XM 3. This is useful for switching the preset item. 6 Preset key for receiving the traffic audio service
= For details, refer to Using the direct traffic announcement function on page 147. 7 Switching the XM channel select mode You can switch the mode between the two methods for selecting and listing the chan-
nel. ALL CH MODE :
Chapter 27 You can select a channel from all channels when you operate this function. CATEGORY MODE:
You can select a channel within a selected category that you operate this function. 8 Selecting an XM channel directly
= For details, refer to Selecting an XM chan-
nel directly on this page. 9 Switching to the list display You can select the desired channel from the list display.
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel from the list on the next page. a Switching the channel category Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-
gory. U s i n g t h e X M t u n e r Selecting an XM channel directly You can select an XM channel directly by en-
tering the desired channel number. 1 Touch [Direct]. Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired 2 channel number. To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear]. 3 While the input number is displayed, touch [Enter]. The XM channel that was entered is selected. Touch 4 You return to the previous display. Displaying the Radio ID If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played. 1 Touch [Direct]. Input [000] and then touch [Enter]. 2 If you select another channel, display of the Radio ID is canceled. En 145 Chapter 27 Using the XM tuner Storing and recalling broadcast stations With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six broadcast channels for later recall (also with the touch of a key). Select the channel that you want to 1 store in memory. 2 Touch [Preset] to display the preset list. 3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]
to [P6]. The selected station has been stored in mem-
ory. The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key [P1] to [P6] the station is recalled from memory. p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM bands can be stored in memory. p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-
ing the ALL CH MODE. Selecting a channel from the list The list content can be switched so you can search for the track you want to listen to not only by the channel name but also by the artist name or song title. p The channel list shows all channels during ALL CH MODE, and the channels included in the selected category during CATEGORY MODE. To switch the channel mode, touch [Mode]. Touch [List]. 1 XM channel list appears in the display. Each touch of [List] changes the screen as fol-
lows:
Detail information display or Preset list display CH name list (Channel name) Song title list (Song title) Artist name list
(Artist name) 146 En Touch the desired channel that you 2 want to listen to. Touch or vious page. to switch to the next page or pre-
p During CATEGORY MODE, touch [c] or
[d] to switch to another category. p When the list switching operation is started from the detailed information display, the preset list appears in the end of the list se-
lection. Using My Mix function My Mix function memorizes the song title and artist name of the song currently being re-
ceived. When the song that matches the mem-
orized song title and artist name is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to, you will be alerted, and you can switch the station to listen to that song. p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the song title and the artist name are memor-
ized. Memorizing the song The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to can be memorized to My Mix.
% Touch [Memo]. The song title and artist name of current song you are listening to are memorized, and a con-
firmation message appears. p The song title and artist name of up to 12 songs can be memorized. Trying to save more than 12 songs will result in older ones being overwritten. Chapter 27 U s i n g t h e X M t u n e r Touch and hold [TRAFFIC] for two sec-
2 onds or more. That Instant Traffic & Weather channel will be memorized. p Even if you use the SiriusConnect universal tuner together, only one station can be memorized. The station memorized after-
ward will overwrite the existing one. Tuning in to the memorized channel
% Touch [TRAFFIC]. p You can also perform this operation by touching [TRAFFIC] on the AV Source menu. p You can even call up a Instant Traffic &
Weather channel from a source other than the XM source. p To cancel the announcement, touch [TRFC Off] on the screen. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [XM] on the AV Source menu to display the XM screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 2 Touch [Func]. 1 Setting the memorized songs Using the XM tuner p You cannot memorize the song title or the artist name when is dis-
played on the title information. p This function is invalid for the channel 000. p The memorized title may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions. p You can customize the setting for the mem-
orized songs later.
= For more details concerning the opera-
tion, refer to Setting the memorized songs on the next page. When the memorized song is broadcast A beep sounds, and a message is displayed. Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen to that track. p If the memorized song is not checked or when [Off] is selected on [Alert] on MEMO Edit screen, no alert will be pro-
vided.
= Refer to Setting the memorized songs on the next page. p Notification may not be provided depend-
ing on the status of the Navigation System. p If there is even a slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the song being broadcast, no notification will be provided even though they are the same song. Using the direct traffic announcement function You can listen to the memorized Instant Traf-
fic & Weather channel by directly calling it up with [TRAFFIC]. (Only one station can be memorized.) Memorizing an Instant Traffic &
Weather channel 1 channel. Tune into Instant Traffic & Weather En 147 Chapter 27 Using the XM tuner Setting the memorized songs Selecting the songs to alert The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can change the notification setting when the song is broadcast again. You can enable or disable notification for each song. 1 Touch [Memo Edit]. Touch the song title that you want to 2 exclude from the notification list. The check mark is removed, and the song title is excluded from the notification list. Changing the alert setting You can enable or disable alerts for all items at the same time. This function is useful when you want to turn alerts off temporarily without changing each memorized song. 1 Touch [Memo Edit]. Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off]. 2 Touch to toggle the selection. Deleting the memorized songs You can delete each one of the memorized songs from the song title list. 1 Touch [Memo Edit]. Touch and hold the song you want to 2 delete. p To delete all songs that are memorized, touch [Delete All]. 3 Touch [Yes]. 148 En Using the SIRIUS tuner You can use the navigation system to control a Pioneer Sirius satellite digital tuner, which is sold separately. For details concerning operation, refer to the SIRIUS tuners operation manuals. This sec-
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-
tions with navigation system which differs from that described in the SIRIUS tuners op-
eration manual. p When you use the SiriusConnect universal tuner (sold separately) with this navigation system, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is required. For details concerning operation, refer to the owners manual of Pioneer SIR-
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect universal tuner. Reading the screen All Ch Mode Category Mode Chapter 28 Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the tuner is tuned to. 5 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator Shows what channel select mode has been selected. You can select a channel from all channels in All Ch Mode, and select a chan-
nel from the selected category in Category Mode.
= For details, refer to Switch the SIRIUS channel select mode on the next page. 6 SIRIUS station name logo p The message ON THE AIR disappears if the navigation system cannot receive SIRIUS tuner reception for some reason. 7 Variable information area Shows various information about the broad-
cast channel currently being received.
= For more details about the displayed in-
formation, refer to Switch the SIRIUS display on the next page. U s i n g t h e S I I R U S t u n e r Using the touch panel keys
% Touch [SIRIUS] on the AV Source menu to display the SIRIUS screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. All Ch Mode Category Mode 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 SIRIUS band indicator Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se-
lected. 3 Preset number indicator Shows what preset item has been selected. 4 SIRIUS channel number indicator 1 Memorize the current song En 149 Chapter 28 Using the SIRIUS tuner
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song on the next page. 2 Switch the SIRIUS Instant replay mode
= For details, refer to Using the Instant Replay function on page 152. 3 Recall equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer curves on page 164. 4 Display the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using the Function menu on page 152. 5 Recalling channels from the preset Touch to recall the preset channel. Storing broadcast stations You can register the channel currently being broadcast to the preset list. 6 Perform manual tuning The channels move up or down one at a time. p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can skip the broadcasting channels. 7 Select a SIRIUS band Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired SIRIUS band is displayed, SIRIUS 1, SIRIUS 2, or SIRIUS 3. This is useful for switching the preset. 8 Display the map screen 9 Preset key for receiving the traffic audio service
= For details, refer to Using the direct traffic announcement function on the next page. a Switch the SIRIUS channel select mode You can switch the mode between the two methods for selecting and listing the chan-
nel. All Ch Mode:
You can select a channel from all channels when you operate this function. Category Mode:
You can select a channel within a selected category that you operate this function. b Select a SIRIUS channel directly
= For details, refer to Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly on this page. c Switch the SIRIUS display Each touch of [Disp] changes the display information. 150 En Channel number Channel name Channel category Artist name/feature Song/program title Composer d Switch the channel category Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-
gory. Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering the desired channel number. 1 Touch [Direct]. Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired 2 channel number. To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear]. 3 While the input number is displayed, touch [Enter]. The SIRIUS channel that was entered se-
lected. Touch 4 You return to the previous display. Display the Radio ID If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played. 1 Touch [Direct]. Input [000] and then touch [Enter]. 2 If you select another channel, display of the Radio ID is canceled. Storing and recalling broadcast stations With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
[P1] to [P6], you can easily store up to six broadcast stations for later recall (also with the touch of a key). Select the channel that you want to 1 store in memory. 2 Touch [Preset] to display the preset list. Using the SIRIUS tuner 3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]
to [P6]. The selected station has been stored in mem-
ory. The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key [P1] to [P6] the station is recalled from memory. p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS bands can be stored in memory. p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-
ing All Ch Mode. Using My Mix function The MyMix function memorizes the song title and artist name of the song currently being re-
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-
ized song title and artist name is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to, you will be alerted, and you can switch the station to listen to that song. p The track itself is NOT downloaded; only the song title and the artist name are mem-
orized. Memorizing the song The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to can be memorized.
% Touch [Memo]. The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are memorized, and a confir-
mation message appears. p Up to 10 song titles and artist names can be memorized. p You cannot memorize the song title or the artist name when is dis-
played on the title information. p You cannot memorize the song title or the artist name of channel 000. p The memorized title may not be displayed correctly. When the memorized song is broadcast A beep sounds, and a message is displayed. Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen to that track. p If the alert for the song is Off or [Alert Off] is selected, no notification will be pro-
vided even when that song is broadcast.
= For details, refer to Setting the memor-
ized songs on the next page. p Notification may not be provided depend-
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-
tem.
= For details, refer to Selecting the songs to alert on the next page. p If there is even a slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the track being broadcast, no notification will be provided even though they are the same song. Chapter 28 U s i n g t h e S I I R U S t u n e r Using the direct traffic announcement function You can listen to a memorized traffic channel by directly calling it up with the [TRAFFIC]
(Only one station can be memorized). Memorizing an traffic channel 1 Tune in to a traffic channel. Touch and hold [TRAFFIC] for two sec-
2 onds or more. The traffic channel will be memorized. p Even if you use this with the XM satellite radio tuner, only one station can be memor-
ized. The station memorized afterward will overwrite the existing one. p The channels 000 can not be memorized. Tuning in to the memorized channel
% Touch [TRAFFIC]. p You can also perform this operation by touching [TRAFFIC] on the AV Source menu. p To cancel a traffic announcement, touch
[TRFC Off]. En 151 Chapter 28 Using the SIRIUS tuner Using the Instant Replay function The Instant Replay function allows you to replay the stored broadcast on the SIRIUS tuner (if the tuner capable for this function). As soon as you tune to a channel, the SIRIUS tuner automatically begins storing the broad-
cast. It can store approximately up to 44 min-
utes previous (depending on the selected channel and the memory capacity of con-
nected tuner). Touch [Instant Replay] on the SIRIUS 1 screen to activate the Instant Replay mode. 2 Touch keys for Instant Replay.
[o]
Return to the start of the current song or program. Touching again will skip back to the previous song or program.
[o] and hold Fast reverses.
[p]
Forwards play to the next song or program
[p] and hold Fast-forwards.
[f]
Touching [f] switches between playback and pause. p During Instant Replay mode, each touch of [Disp] changes the display information as follows;
Time position Channel number Chan-
nel name Channel category Artist name/feature Song/program title Composer p You cannot replay the broadcast prior to the beginning of stored data. Using the Function menu 1 Touch [SIRIUS] on the AV Source menu to display the SIRIUS screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 152 En 2 Touch [Func]. 1 Setting the memorized songs
= For details, refer to this page. 2 Using the Game Alert function
= For details, refer to the next page. 3 Displaying Game Information
= For details, refer to the next page. Setting the memorized songs Selecting the songs to alert Display the song title list memorized for the MyMix Function (MyMix list). You can change the setting of the notification when the song is broadcast again. You can enable or disable no-
tification for each song. 1 Touch [Memo]. Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the 2 desired song. 3 Touch [On/Off] to turn the setting on. When the alert for the song is activated, [ON]
appears at the beginning of the selected title. p Touch [On/Off] again to turn the setting off. Using the SIRIUS tuner Changing the alert setting You can enable or disable alerts for all items at the same time. This function is useful when you want to turn alerts off temporarily without changing each memorized song. 1 2 Touch [Memo]. Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off]. p Touch to toggle the selection. Deleting the memorized songs You can delete each one of the memorized tracks from the song title list. 1 Touch [Memo]. Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the 2 song title that you want to delete. Touch [Delete] when the song you 3 want to delete is displayed. A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion. 4 Touch [Yes]. Using the Game Alert function Selecting teams for Game Alert This navigation system can alert you when games involving your favorite sports teams are about to start. To use this function you need to store the teams you want to follow in advance. Chapter 28 U s i n g t h e S I I R U S t u n e r Touch [On/Off]. 4 The team displayed as [ON] is the alert target. p When the selected team is excluded from the alert target, the team is displayed as
[OFF]. Up to 12 teams can be selected. When you have already made 12 team se-
lections, FULL is displayed and additional team selection is not possible. In this case, first delete the team selection and then try again. 5 Touch [Alert On]. Changing the alert setting You can enable or disable the alert for selected items. This function is useful when to want to turn the alert off temporarily without changing the setting of each selected team. 1 2 Touch [Game Alert]. Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off]. p Touch to toggle the selection. When a game involving one of your teams is broadcast A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to switch the station, and you can view the game information. If you touch [Stay], the channel does not switch. p Alerts may not be provided depending on the status of the navigation system. 1 Touch [Game Alert]. Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the 2 league. Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the 3 team. Displaying Game Information An alert will be displayed when a game with the team you selected is about to start (or is currently under way). You can also display game information and changes to the broad-
cast channel. En 153 Chapter 28 Using the SIRIUS tuner p The Game Information function is available when [Alert] is [On] in Game Alert. 1 Touch [Game Info]. Touch [Prev] or [Next] to view the game 2 score information which is registered. p The game score will be updated automati-
cally. p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel that broadcasts the displayed game. p If you have not made any team selections, Not Set is displayed. p When no games involving your favorite teams are currently being played NO GAME is displayed. 154 En Chapter 29 U s i n g A V i n p u t Using AV input You can display video image output by AV1 Input or AV2 Input to the screen of the navi-
gation system. For details of the connection method, refer to Installation Manual. Using the touch panel keys
% Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. CAUTION For safety reasons, video images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view video images, you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake. Using AV1 You can display video image output by the equipment connected to AV1 Input. Touch [AV1 Input] on the AV System 1 Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1
(AV1) on page 159. Touch [AV1] on the AV Source menu. 2 The image is displayed on the screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. Using AV2 You can display video image output by the equipment connected to AV2 Input. 1 Hide the touch panel keys Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again. Touch [AV2 Input] on the AV System 1 Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Setting video input 2
(AV2) on page 159. Touch [AV2] on the AV Source menu. 2 The image is displayed on the screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. En 155 Chapter 30 Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2) The term external unit refers to future Pioneer devices that are not currently planned for, or to devices that allow control of basic functions although they are not fully con-
trolled by the navigation system. Two external units can be controlled by this navigation sys-
tem. When two external units are connected, the navigation system allocates them as exter-
nal unit 1 or external unit 2. For details of the connection method, refer to Installation Manual. For details concerning operation, refer to the external units operation manual. This section provides information on external unit opera-
tions with the navigation system that differ from those described in the external units op-
eration manual. p Operation varies depending on the external unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-
nal unit may not respond.) Reading the screen 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 External unit indicator Displays the information that is sent by con-
nected external units. 3 Auto/Manual mode indicator Shows the current mode. 4 Current time Using the touch panel keys
% Touch [EXT1] or [EXT2] on the AV Source menu to select the external unit.
= For details concerning operations, refer to Screen switching overview on page 34. 156 En 1 Send a band command Touch to send a band command to the ex-
ternal unit. p Operation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases, the external unit may not respond.) 2 Send an [a], [b], [c], or [d] command Touch to operate the external unit. p Operation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases, some functions may not be used until you touch and hold the key.) 3 Switching between automatic and man-
ual function You can turn automatic and manual func-
tion on or off. You can switch between Auto and Manual functions of the external unit connected. Initially, this function is set to Auto. p Operating commands set for Auto and Manual operations vary depending on the external unit connected. 4 Send a 1 key to 6 key command The external unit can be operated by trans-
mitting the operating commands set to 1 key 6 key. p Operation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases, some functions may not be used until you touch and hold the key.) 5 Use F1 F4 to operate the external unit The external unit can be operated by trans-
mitting the operating commands set to F1 F4. p The operating commands set to F1 F4 vary depending on the external unit. p Some functions may not be used until you touch and hold the key. Other functions Selecting the video for Rear display You can choose either to show the same image as the front screen or to show the se-
lected source on the Rear display.
% Touch [Rear View] on the AV Source menu. Each touch of [Rear Screen] changes the set-
tings as follows:
! Mirror AV The video on the front screen of the navigation unit is output to the Rear display
! iPod The video and sound of the iPod are output to the Rear display
! Disc The video and sound of the DVDs are output to the Rear display
! AV1 The video and sound of AV1 are output to the Rear display
! AV2 The video and sound of AV2 are output to the Rear display p When [Mirror AV] is selected, the following restrictions are applied to Rear display. When selecting [Rear View] in the map display, nothing is displayed. All sounds cannot be output for Rear display. p When Disc is selected, the following restric-
tions are applied to Rear display. When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is set in the built-in DVD drive, nothing is output. p When iPod is selected, the following restric-
tions are applied to Rear display. The Video image and sound are output only when the appropriate setting on
[AV1 Input] is [iPod]. p When AV is selected, the following restric-
tions are applied to Rear display. The Video image and sound are output only when AV1/AV2 has both video and sound. The Video image and sound are output only when the appropriate setting on
[AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] are
[Video]. Operating the picture adjustment CAUTION For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake. Refer to Important Information for the user (a separate manual). You can adjust the picture for each source and rear view camera. Press and hold the MODE button. 1 Press and hold to display the Picture Adjust-
ment screen. Chapter 31 O t h e r f u n c t i o n s
! Brightness Adjusts the black intensity
! Contrast Adjusts the contrast
! Color Adjusts the color saturation
! Temp Adjusts the tone of color (red is emphasized or green is emphasized)
! Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of dis-
play
! [Camera] Shows the picture adjustment display for the rear view camera p Touching [Source] while adjusting the rear view camera image returns you to the pre-
vious screen. p The adjustments of Brightness and Contrast are stored separately when your vehicles headlights are off (daytime) and when your vehicles headlights are on
(nighttime). These are switched automati-
cally depending on the vehicles headlights are on or off. En 157 Chapter 31 Other functions p You cannot adjust Color and Temp for the source without a video and navigation map display. p The setting contents can be memorized se-
parately for the following screen and the Video image. AM/FM/CD/ROM/iPod(Music)/SD
(audio)/USB(audio)/Bluetooth Audio/
XM/SIRIUS/Digital Radio screen AV1 and iPod(Video) DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX SD(Video) and USB(Video) AV2 and EXT1, EXT2 Rear view camera image Navigation map and menu screen p The picture adjustment may not be avail-
able with some rear view cameras. p Because of the LCD screen characteristics, you may not be able to adjust the screen at low temperatures. Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the desired 2 item. Each time you touch [+] or [-] increases or de-
creases the level of the desired item. Touch 3 screen. to return to the previous 158 En Customizing preferences Options on the AV System Settings menu Displaying the AV System Settings menu 1 Top Menu. Press the HOME button to display the Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. Touch [AV Settings]. 3 The AV System Settings menu appears. p You can only adjust [Wide Mode] when se-
lecting an AV source with video. p You can only adjust the following items when the AV source is Off;
[Rear SP], [Auto PI] and [FM Step]
Setting video input 1 (AV1) You can switch this setting according to the connected component. p This setting applies to RCA inputs
(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on the back of the system. Chapter 32 C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s
% Touch [AV1 Input] on the AV System Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-
tem Settings menu on this page. Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-
ting as follows:
! iPod iPod connected with the USB Inter-
face cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)
! Video External video component
! Off No video component is connected Setting video input 2 (AV2) You can switch this setting according to the connected component. p This setting applies to mini-jack input.
% Touch [AV2 Input] on the AV System Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-
tem Settings menu on this page. Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-
ting as follows:
! Off No video component is connected
! EXT Pioneer external unit connected with the RCA video cable
! Video External video component p Use AV2 Input when connecting CD-
V150M (sold separately) through the exter-
nal video component. Switching the auto antenna setting If the blue lead of the navigation system is connected to the antenna control terminal of the vehicle, select either of the following set-
tings.
! Power The antenna extends or turns on when the ignition switch is turned on. The antenna is stored or turned off when the ignition switch is turned off.
! Radio The antenna extends or turns on only when the audio source is FM or AM. The antenna is stored or turned off when the AV source is switched to another source. En 159 Chapter 32 Customizing preferences
% Touch [ANT CTRL] on the AV System Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-
tem Settings menu on the previous page. Touching [ANT CTRL] switches between
[Radio] and [Power]. p Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]
is selected, turning off the ignition switch will cause the antenna to automatically re-
tract or turn off. Changing the wide screen mode
% Touch [Wide Mode] on the AV System Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-
tem Settings menu on the previous page. Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-
ting as follows:
! Full (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV picture (normal picture) without any omissions.
! Cinema (cinema) A picture is enlarged by the same propor-
tion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direc-
tion and by an intermediate proportion between Full and Zoom in the vertical di-
rection; ideal for a cinema-sized picture
(wide screen picture) where captions lie outside the frame.
! Zoom (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-
portion both vertically and horizontally;
ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture).
! Normal (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving you no sense of disparity since its propor-
tions are the same as that of the normal picture. p Different settings can be stored for each video source. p The same setting is automatically applied for the following grouping. 160 En
! DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX
! EXT1 and EXT2
! AV1 and AV2
! iPod p When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original as-
pect ratio, it may look strange. p Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may constitute an infringement on the authors rights protected by the Copyright Law. p The navigation map and the rear view cam-
era picture is always viewed at Full. Setting the rear output The navigation systems rear output can be used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer connection. If you switch Rear SP to Sub. W, you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp. Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear full-range speaker connection (Full). p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. (When you use the product without RCA rear output, this setting only applies to the rear speaker leads.) p Rear SP can be set only when the source is
[Off]. Touch [Rear SP] on the AV System Set-
1 tings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-
tem Settings menu on the previous page. Touch [Rear SP] to switch the rear out-
2 put setting. When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select Full. When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select Sub. W. Customizing preferences Switching the muting/
attenuation timing You can mute the AV source volume or attenu-
ate the output signal. This setting is invalid for the mute signal has been received from the MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.
(Even if this setting is [Off], the navigation sys-
tem will mute or attenuate the audio source volume when the signal is output via MUTE lead.)
% Touch [Mute] on the AV System Set-
tings menu. Each touch of [Mute] changes the settings as follows:
! Guide/Tel/VR The volume is muted or at-
tenuated according to the following condi-
tions When the navigation outputs the gui-
dance voice. When you use a cellular phone via Blue-
tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-
coming call). When the voice recognition mode is ac-
tivated.
! Tel/VR The volume is muted or attenu-
ated according to the following conditions When you use a cellular phone via Blue-
tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-
coming call). When the voice recognition mode is ac-
tivated.
! Off The volume does not change p Operation returns to normal when the cor-
respond action is ended. Switching the muting/
attenuation level You can select the muting/attenuation level of
[Mute]. This setting is also effective for a mute signal that has been received from the MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit. p This menu is not available in the following cases:
AV source is [Off]
Chapter 32 C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s During muting/attenuation
% Touch [Mute Level] on the AV System Settings menu. Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-
tings as follows:
! ATT The volume becomes 1/10
! 10dB The volume becomes 1/3
! Mute The volume becomes 0 p When you select [Mute], [Mute] is dis-
played and no audio adjustments are possi-
ble during the sound is turned off. p When you select [ATT] or [10dB], no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible during the sound is attenuated. p Operation returns to normal when the cor-
respond action is ended. p Even when a mute signal has been received from MUTE lead connected to the naviga-
tion unit, navigation voice guidance cannot be attenuated or muted. Changing the voice output of the navigation guidance You can set the speaker to output the naviga-
tion guidance and phone voice, etc.
% Touch [Guidance/Tel SP] on the AV Sys-
tem Settings menu. Each touch of [Guidance/Tel SP] changes the settings as follows:
! L+R SP Uses both the front right and left speakers
! Left SP Uses only the front left speaker
! Right SP Uses only the front right speak-
er Acquiring/Cataloging iPod music information If you always set the language other than Eng-
lish on Program language, this setting is unnecessary. En 161 Chapter 32 Customizing preferences Unless [VR Catalog Mode] is turned off, this navigation system tries to acquire the informa-
tion needed to operate iPod with voice com-
mands. It may take a short period of time to transfer the information. Change the setting according to your usage. The navigation system starts acquiring/catalo-
ging music information (1) when the iPod is connected or when the system boots up while the iPod is connected and (2) when iPod is the selected and displayed AV Source, unless [VR Catalog Mode] is turned off. p If you do not use iPod, this setting is un-
necessary. p During transfer, iPod operations (such as
[Shuffle], [Menu], or [Video]) are not available. p Once the cataloging is completed, you can deactivate [VR Catalog Menu] until you update the content/data on iPod. If you up-
date the iPod data, activate [VR Catalog Menu] again to transfer the music informa-
tion and synchronize the music information for voice commands with the data on iPod. p After you select Off in [VR Catalog Mode], the system doesnt catalog the data on the iPod. In such case, the pre-
viously cataloged data are available as voice commands. p Once you start the cataloging process, only a few basic voice commands can be used for iPod until the process has completely finished. p If unreadable characters are included in the data on your iPod, names or types may not be available as voice commands. Important Notice regarding Voice Control for iPods Voice Control for iPods may be limited if cata-
loging of iPod content is not completed. Cata-
loging of iPod content only occurs when the system is in AV Source mode and the iPod is the selected and displayed AV Source screen. Cataloging of iPod content will not occur if the system is off, if any other AV Source is selected (aside from iPod), or if the 162 En system is in any other mode (aside from AV Source mode) such as Destination Menu, Contacts List, Settings Menu, Phone Menu or the map screen. If you wish to use Voice Control for all iPod content, it is recom-
mended that you first connect your iPod, se-
lect iPod as the AV source, and keep the iPod screen displayed until cataloging is com-
pleted cataloging of iPod content should only take a few minutes, and will depend on the size of the conent stored on your iPod. A message will be displayed when cataloging is completed. Touch [VR Catalog Menu] on the AV 1 System Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-
tem Settings menu on page 159. Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-
2 vate VR Catalog Mode. Displaying your DivX VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this navigation system, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. p New translation required.
% Touch [DivX VOD] on the AV System Settings menu. Your 8-digit registration code is displayed. p Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider. Customizing preferences The AV Sound Settings menu options Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu 1 Top Menu. Press the HOME button to display the Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. Touch [AV Sound]. 3 The AV Sound Settings screen appears. p You cannot make adjustments in the follow-
ing situations:
AV source is [Off]
During muting/attenuation p You cannot select [SLA] when the FM tuner is selected as the AV source. Using balance adjustment You can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. Chapter 32 Touch [FAD/BAL] on the AV Sound Set-
1 tings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on this page. When [Sub. W] is selected in [Rear SP],
[Balance] will be displayed instead of
[FAD/BAL] and front/rear speaker balance cannot be adjusted.
= Refer to Setting the rear output on page 160. Touch [a] or [b] to adjust front/rear 2 speaker balance. Each time you touch [a] or [b], the front/rear speaker balance moves towards the front or the rear. Front:15 to Rear:15 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. Setting Front: and Rear: to 0 is correct when using a two speaker system. Touch [c] or [d] to adjust left/right 3 speaker balance. Each time you touch [c] or [d], the left/right speaker balance moves towards the left or the right. C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/
right speaker balance moves from left to right. En 163 Chapter 32 Customizing preferences Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics as desired.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on the previous page. 2 Touch the equalizer you want. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer curves that you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer curves:
Equalizer curve Super Bass Super Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched sound is boosted. Powerful Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are boosted. Natural Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are slightly boosted. Vocal Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the human vocal range, is boosted. Flat Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted. Custom Custom is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each source. Custom2 Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all AV source. Touch [EQ] on the AV Sound Settings 1 menu. 164 En New translation required. New translation required. New translation required.
! Super Bass
! Powerful
! Natural
! Vocal Touch [EQ] on the AV Sound Settings 1 menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on the previous page. 2 3 Touch [+] or [-] next to Nuance. Touch the equalizer you want. p New translation required. p New translation required. Adjusting the equalizer curves You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be made with a 7-band graphic equalizer. The difference between Custom and Custom2
! A separate Custom curve can be created for each source. If you make adjustments when a curve Super Bass, Powerful, Natural, Vocal, Flat, or Custom is selected, the equalizer curve settings will be memor-
ized in Custom.
! A Custom2 curve can be created common to all sources. If you make adjustments when Custom2 curve is selected, the Cus-
tom2 curve will be updated.
! The adjusted Custom curve is memorized for each of the source selected, but one curve is shared for the following sources. CD, ROM, DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX Customizing preferences AM and FM EXT1 and EXT2 AV1 and AV2 SD and USB
! The different source volume level can be set between iPod and USB.
! When [Flat] is selected, no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between
[Flat] and a set equalizer curve. Touch [EQ] on the AV Sound Settings 1 menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 163. 2 Touch the one of keys to select a curve that you want to use as the basis of custo-
mizing. 3 Touch [Customize]. Touch the frequency that you want to 4 adjust the level. Touch [a] or [b] to adjust the level of 5 the equalizer band. Each time you touch [a] or [b], the level of the equalization band increases or decreases. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. Touch [Loudness] on the AV Sound 1 Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 163. Chapter 32 C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s Using subwoofer output The navigation system is equipped with a sub-
woofer output mechanism, which can be turned on or off. p Only when Sub Woofer is [On], you can adjust Phase, Level and Frequency. Touch [Sub Woofer] on the AV Sound 1 Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 163. Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output 2 on. To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off]. Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select 3 the phase of subwoofer output. Touch [+] or [-] next to Level to adjust 4 the output level.
+6 to -24 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Touch [c] or [d] next to Frequency to 5 select cut-off frequency. Each time you touch [c] or [d], cut-off fre-
quencies are selected in the following order:
50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se-
lected range are output from the subwoofer. Touch [Loudness] to select the level you 2 want. Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is selected in the following order:
Off Low Mid High En 165 Chapter 32 Customizing preferences Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, activate HPF
(high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Touch [HPF] on the AV Sound Settings 1 menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 163. Enhancing bass (Bass Booster) The Bass Booster enhances bass sounds, which can be muted by driving noise. Touch [Bass Booster] on the AV Sound 1 Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 163. Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the range from 2 0 to 6. 2 Touch [HPF] to select cut-off frequency. Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
Off 50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz Setting the simulated sound stage You can select the desired effect from various simulated sound stages, such as Music Studio or Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a lis-
tener positioning effect. Setting a stage that fits your image 1 Touch [Staging] on the AV Sound Set-
tings menu. 2 Touch desired stage setting. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra-
dical changes in volume when switching be-
tween sources. p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad-
just. p [Living Room] setting that emphasizes mid-range sound hardly has any effect near the maximum volume level. p When you set staging to an option other than [Off], the high pass filter (HPF) setting turns [Off].
= For details, refer to Using the high pass filter on this page. Touch [SLA] on the AV Sound Settings 2 menu.
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sound Settings menu on page 163. Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the source vo-
3 lume. SLA +4 to SLA -4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. The following AV sources are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically.
! DVD-V and DVD-VR
! CD, ROM, DivX
! EXT1 and EXT2
! AV1 and AV2
! SD and USB p The different source volume level can be set between iPod and USB. 166 En Customizing preferences Adjusting a position effect You can select a listener position that you want to make as the center of sound effects. Touch [Staging] on the AV Sound Set-
1 tings menu. 2 3 Touch [Position]. Touch desired position. Chapter 32 C u s t o m i z i n g p r e f e r e n c e s En 167 Chapter 33 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice To Ensure Safe Driving CAUTION For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the voice operation as much as possible while driving. If you use voice operation, select [English] in
[Program language] of Language. If you se-
lect other languages, voice operation will not be available. Basics of Voice Operation Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest in voice recognition technology. You can use voice commands to operate many of its func-
tions. This chapter describes where you can use voice commands, and also what com-
mands the system accepts. Flow of voice operation You can start voice operation any time even when the map screen is displayed or audio is operating. (Some operations are not available.) The basic steps of voice operations are as fol-
lows. Switch the screen to map screen or AV 1 operation screen. Press the VOICE button to activate 2 voice operations. Speak a command into the microphone 3 after the beep. 4 When the command is recognized, the navigation system displays next options on the screen, and pronounces it in some cases. 5 Repeat previous step as necessary. The requested operation will be carried 6 out. p The voice operation may not be operable for a minute after the navigation system has booted up. 168 En Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Chapter 33 Starting voice operation
% Press the VOICE when the map screen or the AV operation screen is displayed. The voice operation screen appears. How to use the voice operation Searching for a location by address In this example, you want to search for a loca-
tion by address and set it as your destination. 1 2
You can listen to the brief operating instruc-
tion.
cancels voice operation. You can cancel the voice operation feature at any time by saying Cancel. After you cancel voice operations, the display returns to the screen displayed before the voice op-
eration screen appeared. Press the MODE button to display the 1 map screen or the AV operation screen. Press the VOICE button to activate 2 voice operations. A list of commands for voice operation ap-
pears. After the message, the beep indicates that the system is ready to accept your voice command. Say a command after this beep. Say I need directions. 3 New translation required. Say Find an address. 4 A message to prompt the next operation is given. 5 New translation required. p When the list of candidates with number appears, say the number that you want to select. When you select the entry next to 1, say Number One. p New translation required. Searching for a location by address In this example, you want to search for a POI and set it as your destination. Press the MODE button to display the 1 map screen or the AV operation screen. Press the VOICE button to activate 2 voice operations. A list of commands for voice operation ap-
pears. After the message, the beep indicates that the system is ready to accept your voice command. Say a command after this beep. Say I need directions. 3 New translation required. O p e r a t i n g Y o u r N a v i g a t i o n S y s t e m w i t h V o i c e En 169 Chapter 33 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Say Point of interest. 4 A message to prompt the next operation is given. 5 New translation required. p When the list of candidates with number appears, say the number that you want to select. When you select the entry next to 1, say Number One. p New translation required. Calling the entry on Contacts A method for dialing the entry named Nancy is described here along with an operational ex-
ample. Press the VOICE button to activate 1 voice operations. Say Call Nancy to make a call. 2 Dialing starts. Operating iPod by voice You can play music using voice operation from the iPod connected to the navigation system. p Playback of iPod movies is not available using voice commands. p To use the content/data on the iPod for voice operation, transfer the data to this system first.
= For details, refer to Acquiring/Cataloging iPod music information on page 161. Examples of voice operation of the iPod are shown below. (A method for playing the album title named Pioneer is described here, along with an operational example.) Press the VOICE button to activate 1 voice operations. Say Change Source to display the AV 2 source selection screen. Say iPod on the selection screen to 3 switch the AV source to iPod. p Touching the item on the screen also en-
ables you to select the desired AV source. Press the VOICE button to activate 4 voice operations. Say Play the album Pioneer to play-
5 back the album name Pioneer. If the command is recognized properly, play-
back starts from the first song of Pioneer. 170 En Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Chapter 33 Available Basic Voice Commands The navigation system can also recognize the words in the following list. Basic commands Voice commands and operations Back d Returns the previous screen. Cancel d Cancels the voice operation. Help d Outputs the brief operating instruction by voice. Next page, Previous page d Switch the page. Last page, First page d Switch to the last or first page. Voice operation for the iPod For <Artist name>, <Album name>, <Play-
list name>, <Genre name> shown on the fol-
lowing chart, say the name their name in the iPod. p Playback of iPod movies is not available using voice commands. Voice commands and operations Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly. Pause the music, Stop the music d Pauses the song currently playing . Resume the music d Resumes the song currently playing . Next song d Plays the next song. Previous song d Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing. Play songs d Start playback from the top of Songs. Play artists d Start playback from the top of Artists. Play the artist <Artist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected artist. Play albums d Start playback from the top of Albums. Play the album <Album name> d Start playback from the top of the selected album. Play playlists d Start playback from the top of Playlists. Play the playlist <Playlist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected playlist. Play genres d Start playback from the top of Genres. Play the genre <Genre name> d Start playback from the top of the selected genre. Show artists d Displays the artist list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands. Show the artist <Artist name> d Displays the album list of the selected artist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands. O p e r a t i n g Y o u r N a v i g a t i o n S y s t e m w i t h V o i c e En 171 Chapter 33 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Show albums d Displays the album list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the de-
sired voice commands. Show the album <Album name> d Displays the song list of the selected album together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands. Show playlists d Displays the playlist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands. Show the playlist <Playlist name> d Displays the song list of the selected playlist together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands. Show genre d Displays the genre list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands. Show the genre <Genre name> d Displays the song list of the selected genre list together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands. Show songs d Displays the song list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands. Next page, Previous page d Displays the previous or next page of the selection list. (Note 1)
(Note 1) The voice commands is available only when the selection list is displayed. Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod) AV source selection Voice commands and operations Change Source to DISC d Switch the AV source to DISC. Change Source to FM d Switch the AV source to FM. Change Source to AM d Switch the AV source to AM. Change Source to XM Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to XM. Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to SIRIUS. Change Source to HD Radio d Switch the AV source to Digital Radio. Change Source to SD Media d Switch the AV source to SD. Change Source to USB d Switch the AV source to USB. Change Source to iPod d Switch the AV source to iPod. Change Source to Bluetooth Audio d Switch the AV source to Bluetooth Audio. External storage device (USB, SD) Voice commands and operations Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly. Pause the music, Stop the music d Pauses the song currently playing . Resume the music d Resumes the song currently playing . Next song d Plays the next song. Previous song d Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing. 172 En Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Chapter 33 Voice commands related to hands-free phoning p You can make a phone call by voice dialing if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is being paired with the navigation system. p For <entrys name> shown on the follow-
ing chart, say the name of the entry stored in Contacts. p For <phone number> shown on the follow-
ing chart, say the desired phone number. Voice commands and operations Call <entrys name> d Make a call to the entry (Note 2). Call <entrys name> mobile d Dial the cellular phone number of the entry (Note 3). Call <entrys name> home d Dial the home phone number of the entry (Note 3). Call <entrys name> office d Dial the office phone number of the entry (Note 3). Call <phone number> d Dial the phone number. Make a call d Say the phone number you want to call d The system starts dialing to the number. Make a call d Say the name of entry stored on Contacts you want to call d The system starts dialing to the num-
ber (Note2). List outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (Dialled Calls) to select the number and call. List recent calls d Incoming calls (Note 4) d Display the list of recently received calls (Received Calls) to select the number and call. List recent calls d Outgoing calls (Note 4) d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (Dialled Calls) to select the number and call. List recent incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (Received Calls) to select the number and call.
(Note 2) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone number or touch the one of listed item that you want to dial.
(Note 3) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry. In such case, say the type of phone number or touch the one of listed item that you want to dial.
(Note 4) Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list. O p e r a t i n g Y o u r N a v i g a t i o n S y s t e m w i t h V o i c e En 173 Chapter 33 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice Tips for Voice Operation For your voice commands to be correctly re-
cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-
tions are suitable for recognition. Close the vehicle windows Please note that wind through the vehicle win-
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the vehicle can interfere with voice operation. Position the microphone carefully For optimum pick-up, the microphone should be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front of the driver. Pause before giving a command Speaking too soon may cause the recognition to fail. Pronounce your commands carefully Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly. 174 En Chapter 34 O t h e r f u n c t i o n s Other functions Setting the anti-theft function You can set a password for the navigation sys-
tem. If the back-up lead is cut after the pass-
word is set, the navigation system prompts for the password at the time of next boot up. Touch [OK]. 8 Password protection is applied. p If you want to change the password cur-
rently set, enter the current password and then enter the new one. Setting the password 1 Top Menu. Press the MENU button to display the Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and 3 then touch and hold Area3. Area1 Area2 Area3 Touch [Set Password]. 4 The password setting screen appears. 5 Enter the password you want to set. p 5 to 16 characters can be entered for a password. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Reenter the password to confirm the setting. Entering the password On the password input screen, you must enter the current password. If you enter an incorrect password three times, the screen is locked and operations using touch panel keys are dis-
abled. 1 Enter the password. Touch [OK]. 2 The message The unit has been locked be-
cause an invalid password was entered three times. Turn ACC off and on, and enter your password. appears if you entered the correct password and the navigation sys-
tem is unlocking. Deleting the password The current password can be deleted. 1 With the map displayed, press the MENU button. 2 Touch [Settings] on the Top Menu. Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and 3 then touch and hold Area3. Touch [Clear password]. 4 The password setting screen appears. 5 6 Enter the current password. Touch [OK]. Touch [Yes]. 7 The message for deletion appears and then the current password is deleted. En 175 Touch [Delete user information]. 3 The message confirming whether to erase all user data appears. And then touch [Yes] to erase all user data.
# Touch [Reset]. Various settings registered to the navigation sys-
tem is reset to the default or factory settings. Touch [Yes]. 4 The recorded contents are cleared. Chapter 34 Other functions Forgotten passwords Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-
vice Station. Restoring the default setting Resets various settings registered to the navi-
gation system and restores them to the default or factory settings. p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-
vigation system to the initial state before you operate this function. 1 Display the Destination Menu screen. Touch [Settings]. 2 The Settings Menu screen appears. Touch [Restore Factory Settings]. 3 The message confirming whether to restore the settings appears. 4 Touch [Yes]. Returning the navigation system to the initial state You can return settings or recorded content to the default or factory settings. p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-
vigation system to the initial state before you operate this function. 1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc off. Then start the engine again, and turn the power to the naviga-
tion system back on. The splash screen appears. Press and hold the MODE button and 2 the TRK (c) button while splash screen ap-
pears. The Data/Setting Clear screen appears. 176 En Appendix Appendix Troubleshooting If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehen-
sive, it should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility. Problems with the navigation screen Symptom Cause Action (Reference) The power doesnt turn on. The navigation system doesnt oper-
ate. Leads and connectors are incor-
rectly connected. The fuse is blown. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocessor to oper-
ate incorrectly. You cannot position your vehicle on the map without a significant positioning error. Confirm once more that all connections are correct. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-
rect fuse with the same rating. Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc off. Then start the engine again, and turn the power to the navigation system back on.
(Page 65) Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-
tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-
tinue driving until reception improves. Keep the antenna clear. The quality of signals from the GPS satellites is poor, causing reduced positioning accuracy. Such a loss of signal quality may occur for the fol-
lowing reasons:
The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-
ble location. Obstacles are blocking signals from the satellites. The position of satellites relative to your vehicle is inadequate. Signals from the GPS satellites have been modified to reduce accu-
racy. (GPS satellites are operated by the US Department of Defense, and the US government reserves the right to distort positioning data for military reasons. This may lead to greater positioning errors.) If a vehicle phone or cellular phone is used near the GPS anten-
na, GPS reception may be lost tem-
porarily. Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray A p p e n d i x Signals from the vehicles speed pulse are not being picked up prop-
erly. paint or vehicle wax, because this may block the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup can also degrade the signals. Check that the cables are properly connected. If necessary, consult the dealer that installed the system. En 177 Appendix Appendix You cannot position your vehicle on the map without a significant positioning error. The map color does not switch automatically between daytime and nighttime. The screen is too bright. The display is very dim. No sounds of AV source are pro-
duced. The volume level will not rise. The volume of navigation gui-
dance and beeps cannot be ad-
justed. The person on the other end of the phone call cannot hear the conversation due to an echo. Theres no picture. Rear display picture disap-
pears. 178 En The navigation system may not be mounted securely in your vehicle. The navigation system is installed with an extreme angle exceeding the installation angle limitations. Indication of the position of your ve-
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or reversing.
[Night mode] is set to [Day]. The orange/white lead is not con-
nected. An improper value has been set on Brightness.
[Automatic] is selected in Night mode. An improper value has been set on Brightness. The volume level is low. The attenuator or mute is on. A speaker lead is disconnected. Try to adjust them with VOL (+/) button. The voice from the person on the other end of the phone call is output from the speakers and then picked up by the microphone again, creat-
ing an echo. The parking brake cord is not con-
nected. The parking brake is not applied. The backlight of the LCD panel is turned off. The source disc being listened to in the navigation system has been ejected. There is a problem with the Rear display, for example a faulty wiring connection. An AV source that cannot output to the rear display is selected. Check that the navigation system is securely mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer that installed the system. Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-
tion system must be installed within the al-
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to Installation Manual.) Check whether or not the reverse gear signal input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The navigation system works properly without the lead connected, but positioning accuracy will be adversely affected.) Check [Night mode] setting and make sure
[Automatic] is selected. (Page 49) Check the connection. Check the settings. Check the setting of [Night mode] and select
[Automatic] or [Day]. (Page 49) Check the settings. Adjust the volume level. Turn the attenuator or mute off. Check the connection. Turn the volume up or down using [Volume]
on the Navi Settings menu. (Page 96) Use the following methods to reduce the echo:
Lower the volume on the receiver Have both parties pause slightly before speaking Connect the parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. Connect the parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. Turn on the backlight. (Page 100) Before ejecting the disc, switch the source. This problem may occur when certain con-
nection methods are used. Check the Rear display and its connection. Select an appropriate AV source. Appendix Appendix Nothing is displayed and the touch panel keys cannot be used. There is no response when the touch panel key are touched, or a different key responds. The external storage device
(USB, SD) cannot be used. Problems in the AV screen The setting for the rear view camera is incorrect. Select the appropriate setting for the rear view camera. The shift lever was placed in [R]
when the rear view camera was not connected. The touch panel keys deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch for some reason. The USB storage device has been removed immediately after plugging it. Select the correct polarity setting for [Back Camera]. (Page 98) Perform touch panel calibration. (Page 98) Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc off. Then start the engine again, and turn the power to the navigation system back on. Symptom Cause Action (Reference) CD or DVD playback is not pos-
sible. The screen is covered by a cau-
tion message and the video can-
not be shown. No video output from connected equipments. No video output from connected iPod. The audio or video skips. No sounds are produced. The volume level will not rise. The icon 9 is displayed, and op-
eration is not possible. The disc is inserted upside down. The disc is dirty. The disc is cracked or otherwise da-
maged. The files on the disc are an irregular file format. The disc format cannot be played back. The loaded disc is a type this system cannot play. The parking brake lead is not con-
nected or applied. The parking brake interlock is acti-
vated.
[AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] setting is incorrect. The connection of the USB interface cable for iPod is incorrect. Insert the disc with the label upward. Clean the disc. Insert a normal, round disc. Check the file format. Replace the disc. Check what type of disc it is. (For more cau-
tions about handling each type of media, refer to Page 189.) Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and apply the parking brake. Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. Correct the settings. (Page 155) A p p e n d i x Connect both the USB plug and the RCA cable side. (If only one of these connection has been made, the iPod will not work prop-
erly.) (Page 31) Secure the navigation system firmly. The navigation system is not firmly secured. Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly. The system is performing still, slow motion, or frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video. The system is paused or performing, fast reverse or forward during the disc playback. The operation is not compatible with the video configuration. For the media other than music CD (CD-DA), there is no sound on fast reverse or forward. This operation is not possible. (For example, the DVD playing does not feature that angle, audio system, subtitle language, etc.) There is no sound during still, slow motion, or frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video. En 179 Appendix Appendix The picture stops (pauses) and the navigation system cannot be operated. The picture is stretched, with in-
correct aspect ratio. A parental lock message is dis-
played and DVD playback is not possible. Parental lock for DVD playback cannot be canceled. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in [DVD/
DivX Setup]. The picture is extremely unclear/
distorted and dark during play-
back. iPod cannot be operated. The iPod is frozen. An error has occurred. The reading of data is impossible during disc playback. After touching g once, start playback once more. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display. Parental lock is on. Select the appropriate setting for that image.
(Page 160, Page 126) Turn parental lock off or change the level.
(Page 127) The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (Page 127) The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in [DVD/DivX Setup]. Switching to a selected language is not possi-
ble if the language selected in [DVD/DivX Setup] is not recorded on the disc. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since the navigation system is compatible with the copy guard analogue copy protect system, the picture may suffer from horizon-
tal stripes or other imperfections when a disc with that kind of protection signal is viewed on some displays. This does not mean the na-
vigation system is malfunctioning.
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface cable for iPod.
! Update the iPod software version.
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface cable for iPod.
! Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc off. Then start the engine again, and turn the power to the navigation system back on.
! Update the iPod software version. Problems with the phone screen Symptom Cause Action (Reference) Dialing is not possible because the touch panel keys for dialing are inactive. Your phone is out of range for ser-
vice. The connection between the cellular phone and the navigation system cannot be established now. Retry after re-entering the range for service. Perform the connection process. If the screen becomes frozen... Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc off. Then start the engine again, and turn the power to the navigation system back on. 180 En Appendix Messages and how to react to them The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a case, follow the instructions given on the display. Messages and how to react to them Message Cause Action (Reference) Appendix A p p e n d i x En 181 Appendix Appendix Messages for audio functions When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists, record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center. The messages in ( ) will appear on the Rear display. Built-in DVD drive Message SD/USB/iPod Message Cause Cause Action (Reference) Action (Reference) 182 En Appendix Positioning technology Positioning by GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each of the satellites, which orbit at a height of 21 000 km, continually broadcasts radio sig-
nals giving time and position information. This ensures that signals from at least three can be picked up from any open area on the earths surface. The accuracy of the GPS information depends on how good the reception is. When the sig-
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS can determine latitude, longitude and altitude for accurate positioning in three dimensions. But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained and positioning errors are somewhat greater. Positioning by Dead Reckoning The built-in sensor in the navigation system also calculates your position. The current loca-
tion is measured by detecting driving distance with the speed pulse, the turning direction with the Gyrosensor and inclination of the road with the G sensor. The built-in sensor can even calculate changes of altitude, and corrects for discre-
pancies in the distance traveled caused by driving along winding roads or up slopes. If you use this navigation system with connect-
ing the speed pulse, the system will become more accurate than no connection of speed Appendix pulse. So you connect the speed pulse without fail to get the accuracy of positioning. p The position of the speed detection circuit vary depending on the vehicle model. For details, consult your authorized Pioneer dealer or an installation professional. p Some types of vehicles may not output a speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-
meters per hour. In such a case, the current location of your vehicle may not be dis-
played correctly while in traffic congestion or in a parking lot. How do GPS and Dead Reckoning work together?
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-
tem continually compares GPS data with your estimated position as calculated from the data of built-in sensor. However, if only the data from the built-in sensor is available for a long period, positioning errors are gradually com-
pounded until the estimated position becomes unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-
nals are available, they are matched with the data of the built-in sensor and used to correct it for improved accuracy. p If you use chains on your wheels for winter driving or put on the spare wheel, errors may suddenly increase because of differ-
ence in wheel diameter. In such case, pressing the RESET button initialize the sensor status and it may recover the accu-
racy to normal condition. A p p e n d i x En 183 Appendix Appendix Map matching As mentioned, the positioning systems used by this navigation system are susceptible to certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-
sion, place you in a location on the map where no road exists. In this situation, the processing system understands that vehicles travel only on roads, and can correct your position by ad-
justing it to a nearby road. This is called map matching. When positioning by GPS is impossible
! GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-
not be received from more than two GPS satellites.
! In some driving conditions, signals from GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle. In this case, it is impossible for the system to use GPS positioning. With map matching Without map matching Handling large errors Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by combining GPS, Dead Reckoning and map matching. However, in some situations, these functions may not work properly, and the error may become bigger. In tunnels or en-
closed parking garages Under elevated roads or similar structures When driving among high build-
ings When driving through a dense forest or tall trees
! If a car phone or cellular phone is used near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may be lost temporarily.
! Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint or car wax, because this may block the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup can also degrade the signals, so keep the antenna clear. p If a GPS signal have not been received for a long time, your vehicles actual position and the current position mark on the map may diverge considerably or may not be up-
dated. In such case, once GPS reception is restored, accuracy will be recovered. 184 En Appendix Conditions likely to cause noticeable positioning errors For various reasons, such as the state of the road you are traveling on and the reception status of the GPS signal, the actual position of your vehicle may differ from the position dis-
played on the map screen.
! If you make a shallow turn.
! If you drive in zigzags.
! If the road has a series of hairpin bends.
! If there is a parallel road.
! If there is a loop or similar road configura-
tion.
! If there is another road very nearby, such as in the case of an elevated freeway.
! If you take a ferry. Appendix A p p e n d i x
! If you take a recently opened road that is not on the map.
! If you are driving on a long, straight road or a gently curving road. En 185 Appendix Appendix
! If you are on a steep mountain road with
! If trees or other obstacles block the GPS many height changes. signals for a considerable period.
! If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot or similar structure using a spiral ramp.
! If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.
! If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-
milar structure.
! If you join the road after driving around a large parking lot.
! If your vehicles wheels spin, such as on a gravel road or in snow.
! When you drive around a traffic circle.
! When starting driving immediately after starting the engine. Route setting information Route search specifications Your navigation system sets a route to your destination by applying certain built-in rules to the map data. This section provides some use-
ful information about how a route is set.
! If you put on chains, or change your tires for ones with a different size. 186 En Appendix drive towards your destination for a while, and try route calculation again.
! When there is a traffic congestion ahead, a detour route may not be suggested if driv-
ing through the traffic congestion would still be better than taking the detour.
! There may be instances when the starting point, the waypoint and the destination point are not on the highlighted route.
! The number of traffic circle exits displayed on the screen may differ from the actual number of roads. Route highlighting
! Once set, the route is highlighted in bright color on the map.
! The immediate vicinity of your starting point and destination may not be high-
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-
larly complex road layouts. Consequently, the route may appear to be cut off on the display, but voice guidance will continue. Auto reroute function
! If you deviate from the set route, the system will re-calculate the route from that point so that you remain on track to the destina-
tion.
! This function may not work under certain conditions. Handling and care of discs Some basic precautions are necessary when handling your discs. A p p e n d i x Appendix CAUTION When a route is calculated, the route and voice guidance for the route are automatically set. Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-
mation about traffic regulations applicable at the time when the route was calculated is shown. One-way streets and street closures may not be taken into consideration. For example, if a street is open during the morning only, but you arrive later, it would be against the traffic regulations so you cannot drive along the set route. When driv-
ing, please follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system may not know some traffic regula-
tions.
! The calculated route is one example of the route to your destination decided by the na-
vigation system while taking the type of streets or traffic regulations into account. It is not necessarily an optimum route. (In some cases, you may not be able to set the streets you want to take. If you need to take a certain street, set a waypoint on that street.)
! If the destination is too far, there may be in-
stances where the route cannot be set. (If you want to set a long-distance route going across several areas, set waypoints along the way.)
! During voice guidance, turns and intersec-
tions from the freeway are announced. However, if you pass intersections, turns, and other guidance points in rapid succes-
sion, some may delay or not be announced.
! It is possible that guidance may direct you off a freeway and then back on again.
! In some cases, the route may require you to travel in the opposite direction to your current heading. In such cases, you are in-
structed to turn around, so please turn around safely by following the actual traffic rules.
! In some cases, a route may begin on the opposite side of a railway or river from your actual current location. If this happens, En 187 Appendix Appendix Built-in drive and care
! Use only conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use shaped discs.
! Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may da-
mage the built-in drive.
! Do not touch the recorded surface of the discs.
! Store discs in their cases when not in use.
! Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-
onments including under direct sunlight.
! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-
micals to the surface of the discs.
! To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth, moving outward from the center.
! Condensation may temporarily impair the built-in drives performance. Leave it to ad-
just to the warmer temperature for about one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth.
! Playback of discs may not be possible be-
cause of disc characteristics, disc format, recorded application, playback environ-
ment, storage conditions and so on.
! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.
! Read the precautions for discs before using them. Ambient conditions for playing a disc
! At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-
ture cutout protects this product by switch-
ing it off automatically. 188 En
! Despite our careful design of the product, small scratches that do not affect actual operation may appear on the disc surface as a result of mechanical wear, ambient conditions for use or handling of the disc. This is not a sign of the malfunction of this product. Consider it to be normal wear and tear. Playable discs DVD-Video and CD DVD and CD discs that display the logos shown below generally can be played on this built-in DVD drive. DVD-Video CD p is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. p It is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs. This DVD drive may not be able to play all discs bearing the marks shown above. AVCHD recorded discs This unit is not compatible with discs recorded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If inserted, the disc may not be ejected. Appendix Appendix Playing DualDisc
! DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other.
! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this navigation system. However, since the CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-
patible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this navigation system.
! Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-
Disc may result in scratches to the disc.
! Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-
blems on this navigation system. In some cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. To prevent this, we recommend you refrain from using DualDisc with this navigation system.
! Please refer to the manufacturer for more detailed information about DualDiscs. Dolby Digital AVIC-Z110BT will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-
nals internally and the sound will be output in stereo. (Equipped with optical output for fu-
ture extension.) p Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Detailed information for playable media Compatibility Common notes about disc compatibility
! Certain functions of this product may not be available for some discs.
! Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-
teed.
! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/
DVD-RAM discs.
! Playback of discs may become impossible with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-
peratures, or depending on the storage conditions in the vehicle. DVD-Video discs
! DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-
gion numbers cannot be played on this DVD drive. The region number of the player can be found on this products chassis. DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs
! Unfinalized discs which have been re-
A p p e n d i x corded with the Video format (video mode) cannot be played back.
! Discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) can be played back. However, unfinalized discs may not be played back. Unplayable discs should be finalized.
! DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have been recorded with Layer Jump recording cannot be played back.
! For more information about recording DTS sound DTS audio cannot be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. DTS is registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. mode, please contact the manufacturer of media, recorders, or writing software.
! The following logo indicates that this unit is compatible with DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). En 189 Appendix Appendix CD-R/CD-RW discs
! Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.
! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-
corder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation on the lens of the built-in drive.
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the recording device, writing software, their settings, and other environmental fac-
tors.
! Please record with the correct format. (For more details, please contact manufacturer of media, recorders, or writing software.)
! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-
played by this product (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)).
! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. Common notes about the external storage device (USB, SD)
! Do not leave the external storage device
(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-
peratures.
! New translation required.
! New translation required.
! New translation required.
! Depending on the kind of the external sto-
rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-
tion system may not recognize the storage device or files may not be played back prop-
erly.
! The text information of some audio and video files may not be correctly displayed.
! File extensions must be used properly. 190 En
! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of files on an external storage de-
vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-
chies.
! Operations may vary depending on the kind of an external storage device (USB, SD).
! It may not be possible to play some music files from SD or USB because of file char-
acteristics, file format, recorded applica-
tion, playback environment, storage conditions, and so on.
! Video playback from SD or USB will be paused when the navigation is displayed. USB storage device compatibility
= For more details about USB storage device compatibility with this navigation system, refer to Specifications on page 207. Protocol: bulk
! You cannot connect a USB storage device to this navigation system via a USB hub.
! Partitioned USB memory is not compatible with this navigation system.
! Firmly secure the USB storage device when driving. Do not let the USB storage device fall onto the floor, where it may become jammed under the brake or gas pedal.
! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data.
! Some USB storage devices connected to this navigation system may generate noise on the radio.
! Do not connect anything other than the USB memory device. The sequence of audio files on USB mem-
ory For USB memory, the sequence is different from that of USB memory device. SD memory card and SDHC memory card
! For more details about SD memory card compatibility with this navigation system, refer to Specifications on page 207. Appendix
! Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any more subtitle files will not be recognized.
! Up to 64 characters can be used for the name of the subtitle file, including the ex-
tension. If more than 64 characters are used for the file name, the subtitle file may not be recognized.
! The character code for the subtitle file should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the characters to be displayed incorrectly.
! The subtitles may not be displayed correctly if the displayed characters in the subtitle file include control code.
! For materials that use a high transfer rate, the subtitles and video may not be comple-
tely synchronized.
! If multiple subtitles are programed to dis-
play within a very short time frame, such as 0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-
played at the correct time. A p p e n d i x Appendix Handling guidelines and supplemental information
! This system is not compatible with Multi Media Card (MMC).
! Copyright protected files cannot be played back. Notes specific to DivX files
! Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-
ner sites are guarantee for proper opera-
tion. Unauthorized DivX files may not operate properly.
! DRM rental files cannot be operated until playing back is started.
! The navigation system corresponds to a DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Search operations beyond this time limit are prohibited.
! DivX VOD file playback requires supplying the ID code of this navigation system to the DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code, refer to Making a phone call using the re-
ceived call history on page 81.
! Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with standard playback of DivX media files.
! For more details about DivX, visit the follow-
ing site:
http://www.divx.com/
DivX subtitle files
! Srt format subtitle files with the extension
.srt can be used.
! Only one subtitle file can be used for each DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be associated.
! Subtitle files that are named with the same character string as the DivX file before the extension are associated with the DivX file. The character strings before the extension must be exactly the same. However, if there is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in a single folder, the files are associated even if the file names are not the same.
! The subtitle file must be stored in the same folder as the DivX file. En 191 Appendix Appendix Media compatibility chart General Media CD-R/-RW DVD-R/-RW/-R DL USB storage de-
vice SD memory card File system ISO9660 level 1, ISO9660 level 2, Romeo and Joliet ISO9660 level 1, ISO9660 level 2, Romeo, Joliet and UDF 1.02 Maximum number of folders Maximum number of files 255 999 3 500 Playable file types MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, AVI, WMV, MPEG-4 FAT16/FAT32 500 15 000 MP3 compatibility Media CD-R/-RW File extension
.mp3 DVD-R/-RW/-R DL USB storage de-
vice SD memory card Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR Sampling frequency 16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz for emphasis) 16 kHz to 48 kHz ID3 tag ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.3 Notes:
! Ver. 2.x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.
! The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist 192 En Appendix WMA compatibility Media CD-R/-RW File extension
.wma DVD-R/-RW/-R DL USB storage de-
vice SD memory card Bit rate 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Note:
! The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice WAV compatibility Media CD-R/-RW File extension
.wav DVD-R/-RW/-R DL USB storage de-
vice SD memory card Format Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM Sampling frequency LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and 44.1 kHz Quantization bits LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits IMA-ADPCM: 3 bits and 4 bits Note:
The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded. Appendix A p p e n d i x En 193 Appendix Appendix AAC compatibility Media CD-R/-RW File extension
.m4a DVD-R/-RW/-R DL USB storage de-
vice SD memory card Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz Notes:
! The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes. DivX compatibility Media CD-R/-RW File extension
.avi/.divx DVD-R/-RW/-R DL USB storage de-
vice SD memory card Profile (DivX version) Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/Ver. 5.x/
Ver. 6.x Compatible audio codec MP3, Dolby Digital Bit rate (MP3) 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR Sampling frequency
(MP3) 16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz for emphasis) Maximum image size 720 pixels 576 pixels Maximum file size 4 GB Notes:
! The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
DivX files on the external storage device
(USB, SD) cannot be played. DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec
! Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight delay in the start of playback on discs.
! If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.
! Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.
! Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and 10.08 Mbps for DVDs. 194 En Appendix Video files compatibility (USB, SD) File extension
.avi Format Compatible video codec MPEG-4 MPEG-4
.mp4 MPEG-4 MPEG-4 H.264 H.264
.m4v MPEG-4 MPEG-4
.wmv WMV WMV Compatible audio codec Recommended video specifications Linear PCM
(LPCM), IMA-
ADPCM MP3 Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels) Bit rate:
768 kbps Frame rate:
30 fps AAC AAC AAC WMA Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels) Bit rate:
768 kbps Frame rate:
30 fps Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels) Bit rate:
384 kbps Frame rate:
30 fps Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels) Bit rate:
768 kbps Frame rate:
30 fps Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels) Bit rate:
384 kbps Frame rate:
30 fps Common notes
! The navigation system may not operate cor-
rectly, depending on the application used to encode WMA files.
! Depending on the version of Windows compressed audio discs play with a short pause between songs. Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed.
! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data.
! The navigation system is not compatible Appendix A p p e n d i x with packet write data transfer.
! This navigation system can recognize up to 32 characters, beginning with the first char-
acter, including extension for the file and folder name. Depending on the display area, the navigation system may try to dis-
play them with a reduced font size. How-
ever, the maximum number of the characters that you can display varies ac-
cording to the width of each character, and of the display area.
! Folder selection sequence or other opera-
tions may be altered, depending on the en-
coding or writing software.
! Regardless of the length of blank section between the songs of original recording, En 195 Appendix Appendix Example of a hierarchy The following figure is an example of the tier structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-
ure indicate the order in which folder numbers are assigned and the order to be played back.
: Folder
: File 1 2 5 6 3 4 second. Bluetooth was launched by a special interest group (SIG) comprising Ericsson Inc., Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM in 1998, and it is currently developed by nearly 2 000 companies worldwide.
! The Bluetooth word mark and logos are re-
gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. SD and SDHC logo Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 SD Logo is a trademark. Notes
! This product assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers.
! If there is a folder that does not contain any playable file, the folder itself will display in the folder list but you cannot check any files in the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also, these folders will be skipped without display-
ing the folder number. Bluetooth SDHC Logo is a trademark. WMA The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later. Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-
nectivity technology that is developed as a cable replacement for cellular phones, hand-
held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-
ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per 196 En Appendix Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-
ated by the DivX video codec from DivX, Inc. This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD video, individual DivX video files are called Titles. When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabeti-
cal order. Plays DivX video. p DivX is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under license. AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-
eral applications can be used to encode AAC files, but file formats and extensions differ de-
pending on the application which is used to encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-
coded by iTunes version 7.7. Appendix Detailed information regarding connectable iPods CAUTION
! Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost from an iPod, even if that data is lost while using the navigation system.
! Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-
tion due to the resulting high temperature.
! Do not leave the iPod in any location with high temperatures.
! Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-
come jammed under the brake or gas pedal. For details, refer to the iPods manuals. iPod A p p e n d i x Made for iPod means that an electronic ac-
cessory has been designed to connect specifi-
cally to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance stan-
dards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. En 197 Appendix Appendix iPhone Touch panel functions. The LCD screen can scratch easily. Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen
! If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air conditioner, make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater may break the LCD screen, and cool air from the cooler may cause moist-
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-
sulting in possible damage.
! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a malfunction.
! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight.
! When using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the LCD screen to prevent disruption of the video in the form of disturbances such as spots or colored stripes. Maintaining the LCD screen
! When removing dust from the LCD screen or cleaning it, first turn the system power off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
! When wiping the LCD screen, take care not to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. LED (light-emitting diode) backlight A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-
play to illuminate the LCD screen.
! At low temperatures, using the LED back-
light may increase image lag and degrade the image quality because of the character-
istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will improve with an increase in temperature.
! The product lifetime of the LED backlight is more than 10 000 hours. However, it may decrease if used in high temperatures. Works with iPhone means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect spe-
cifically to iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc. iTunes iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Using the LCD screen correctly Handling the LCD screen
! When the LCD screen is subjected to direct sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-
come very hot, resulting in possible da-
mage to the LCD screen. When not using this navigation system, avoid exposing it to direct sunlight as much as possible.
! The LCD screen should be used within the temperature ranges shown in Specifica-
tions.
! Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures higher or lower than the operating tem-
perature range, because the LCD screen may not operate normally and could be da-
maged.
! The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-
crease its visibility within the vehicle. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it.
! Do not push the LCD screen with excessive force as this may scratch it.
! Never touch the LCD screen with anything besides your finger when operating the 198 En Appendix
! If the LED backlight reaches the end of its product lifetime, the screen will become dimmer and the image will no longer be visible. In that case, please consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station. Appendix A p p e n d i x En 199 Appendix Appendix Display information Destination Menu Phone Menu screen Page Page
[Dial Pad]
[Call Home]
[Contacts]
[Contacts Transfer]
[Received Calls]
[Dialled Calls]
[Missed Calls]
[GOOG-411]
[Address Search]
[Return Home]
[POI]
[Gas Station]
[ATM]
[Coffee]
[Hotel]
[Spell Name]
[Near Me]
[Near Destination]
[Around City]
[AVIC FEEDS]
[Address Book]
[History]
[Cancel Route]
[MSN Direct]
[Coordinates]
[Route Overview]
200 En Appendix Appendix Settings Menu System Settings menu
[Navi Settings]
[System Settings]
[AV Settings]
[AV Sound]
[Map Settings]
[Bluetooth Settings]
[Setting Rplctr]
Navi Settings Page
[Connection Status]
[3D Calibration Status]
[Gas Mileage]
[Drive Log Settings]
[Demo Mode]
[Set Home]
[Modify Current Location]
Page
[Regional Settings]
Page
[Program language], [Voice lan-
guage]
[Time]
[km / mile]
[Speed]
[Volume]
[Splash Screen]
[Back Camera]
[Screen Calibration]
[Illumi Color]
[Service Information]
[Restore Factory Settings]
A p p e n d i x En 201 Appendix Appendix Map Settings menu AV System Settings menu Page Page
[AV1 Input]
[AV2 Input]
[ANT CTRL]
[Wide Mode]
[Rear SP]
[Mute]
[Mute Level]
[Guidance/Tel SP]
[VR Catalog Menu]
[DivX VOD]
[Displayed Info]
[Close Up View]
[City Map]
[City Map Barrier]
[Show Traffic Incident]
[Bluetooth Connected]
[Current Street Name]
[Address Book Icon]
[3D Landmark]
[Show Manuever]
[MSN Direct]
[Quick Access Selection]
[Overlay POI]
[View Mode]
[Day/Night Display]
[AV Guide Mode]
[Road Color]
202 En Appendix Appendix AV Sound Settings menu Bluetooth Settings Page Page
[FAD/BAL] ([Balance])
[EQ]
[Loudness]
[Sub Woofer]
[HPF]
[SLA]
[Bass Booster]
[Staging]
[Connection]
[Registration]
[Device Name]
[Password]
[Bluetooth On/Off]
[Echo Cancel]
[Auto Answer Preference]
[Refuse All Calls]
[Clear Memory]
[Firmware Update]
A p p e n d i x En 203 Appendix Appendix Glossary AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Aspect ratio This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps units (bits per second). The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Built-in sensor The built-in sensor that enables the system to estimate your vehicles position. CD-DA This stands for a general music CD (commer-
cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this word is sometime used for a distinction be-
tween data CDs (which include compressed audio files) and general music CDs. Chapter Titles of DVD-Video or DVD-VR are in turn di-
vided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With discs featuring chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. Current location The present location of your vehicle; your cur-
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-
angle mark. Destination A location you choose as the end point of your journey. 204 En DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-
pressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX media files are available for down-
load online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to-use tools from DivX.com. DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video, including DivX 6. Favorites A frequently visited location (such as your workplace or a relatives home) that you can register to allow easy routing. GPS Global Positioning System. A network of satel-
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-
ety of purposes. Guidance mode The mode in which guidance is given as you drive to your destination; the system automati-
cally switches to this mode as soon as a route has been set. Guidance point These are important landmarks along your route, generally intersections. The next gui-
dance point along your route is indicated on the map by the yellow flag icon. Home location Your registered home location. Appendix ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-
formation can include the track title, the ar-
tists name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted by the num-
ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for-
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels:
Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-
sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters, half-byte numerals and the _ sign, with a file-extension of three characters). Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-
cluding the separation mark . and a file ex-
tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
! Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters, half-byte numerals and the _ sign, with a file-extension of three characters).
! Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters
(including the separation mark . and a file extension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies.
! Extended formats Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo:
Appendix File names can have up to 128 characters. JPEG This stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group, and is an international still image com-
pression standard. MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard established by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-
tional Standards Organization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the size of a conventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. A p p e n d i x Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi-
ple languages or audio recorded in multiple tracks. For example, dialog in up to 8 lan-
guages can be recorded on a single DVD-Vi-
deo, letting you choose the language as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al-
lows additional data to be recorded later. When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-
sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-
sions in one disc. Multi-subtitle For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting you choose as desired. En 205 tains three separate videos, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func-
tions. Track log Your navigation system logs routes that you al-
ready passed through if the track logger is ac-
tivated. This recorded route is called a track log. It is handy when you want to check a route traveled or if returning along a complex route. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking, CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres-
sion, it is possible to achieve compression-
priority sound quality. Voice guidance The giving of directions by navigation voice while in guidance. Waypoint A location that you choose to visit before your destination; a journey can be built up from multiple waypoints and the destination. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technol-
ogy that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. Appendix Appendix Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing individual files to a CD-R, etc. whenever re-
quired, just as is done with files on floppy or hard disks. Parental lock Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-
vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the units parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Phone book An address book on users phone is collec-
tively referred to as Phone book. Depending on the cellular phone, the Phone book may be called a name such as Contacts, Busi-
ness card or something else. Point of Interest (POI) Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations stored in the data, such as railway stations, shops, restaurants, and amusement parks. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-
sible unless it features the same region num-
ber as the DVD player. Route setting The process of determining the ideal route to a specific location; route setting is done auto-
matically by the system when you specify a destination. Set route The route marked out by the system to your destination. It is highlighted in bright color on the map. Title DVD-Video or DVD-VR discs have a high data capacity, enabling recording of multiple videos on a single disc. If, for example, one disc con-
206 En Appendix Specifications CEA2006 Specifications Power output ............................. 14 W RMS 4 Channels
(4 W and 1 % THD+N) S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 W) Note Specifications and design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to im-
provements. Appendix A p p e n d i x En 207 PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 TEL: 905-479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
: 4413
: (02) 2521-3588 9901-6
: (0852) 2848-6488
<KMZZX> <09E00000>
Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright 2009 by Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in Thailand
<DMD3035-A/N> UC
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2009-06-11 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2009-06-11
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Pioneer Corporation
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0009070665
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
28-8, Honkomagome 2-chome, Bunkyo-ku
|
||||
1 |
Tokyo, N/A 113-0021
|
|||||
1 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
M******@us.ul.com
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
AJD
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
K026
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
M******** S****
|
||||
1 | Title |
Manager
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
81-49********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
81-49********
|
||||
1 |
m******@post.pioneer.co.jp
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
UL Japan Inc
|
||||
1 | Name |
T****** I****
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
907 Kawanishi, Yamakita-ken
|
||||
1 |
Ashigarakami-gun, Kanagawa-ken, 258-0124
|
|||||
1 |
Japan
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
81-46********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
81-46********
|
||||
1 |
T******@jp.ul.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
UL Japan Inc
|
||||
1 | Name |
M******** M****
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
4383-326 Asama-cho
|
||||
1 |
Ise-shi, Mie-ken, 516-0021
|
|||||
1 |
Japan
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
81-59********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
81-59********
|
||||
1 |
M******@jp.ul.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Multi- Media AVN Navigation Server System with BT | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | Power listed is conducted. The antenna of this device must not be co-located or used in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
UL Japan Inc
|
||||
1 | Name |
O******** W********
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
81-46********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
81-46********
|
||||
1 |
O******@jp.ul.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0015100 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC